1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
158 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
159 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
160 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
161 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
163 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
174 by the \SpecialChar LyX
179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
181 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
182 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
183 Documentation mailing list:
184 \begin_inset CommandInset href
186 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
198 \begin_inset Newline newline
202 \begin_inset Newline newline
206 \begin_inset Note Note
209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
210 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
211 \begin_inset Newline newline
216 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
224 \begin_layout Standard
225 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
226 LatexCommand tableofcontents
233 \begin_layout Chapter
237 \begin_layout Section
238 What is \SpecialChar LyX
242 \begin_layout Standard
244 is a document preparation system.
245 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
246 scripts, publishable books, business
247 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
248 It is unlike most other
249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
256 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
258 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
271 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
274 pt type, left justified, 5
275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
284 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
288 \begin_layout Standard
289 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
294 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
298 \begin_layout Standard
303 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
304 's philosophy: most importantly,
305 the format of all of the manuals.
306 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
307 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
313 manual describes that, too.
316 \begin_layout Section
321 \begin_layout Standard
322 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
323 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
325 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
326 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
330 \begin_layout Standard
331 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
332 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
333 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
335 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
336 only a vertical scrollbar.
337 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
338 The first case is large images.
339 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
340 image and use the option
351 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
354 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
355 this doesn't work for equations yet.
358 \begin_layout Standard
359 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
360 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
368 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
375 \begin_layout Section
379 \begin_layout Standard
380 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
382 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
384 Just select the manual you want to read from the
391 \begin_layout Section
392 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
394 \begin_inset CommandInset label
396 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
403 \begin_layout Standard
404 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
405 can be configured via the menu
407 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
411 \begin_inset Index idx
414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
421 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
423 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
424 packages are available.
425 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
427 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
429 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
430 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
434 \begin_inset space \space{}
437 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
438 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
440 To force \SpecialChar LyX
441 to re-inspect your system, you should use
443 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
447 \begin_inset Index idx
450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
451 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
457 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
458 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
461 \begin_layout Section
464 \begin_inset CommandInset label
466 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
473 \begin_layout Standard
474 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
475 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
476 installed, but you will not be
477 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
478 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
479 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
480 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
481 document can always be output as plain text
485 \begin_layout Standard
486 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
487 or DocBook classes or packages.
488 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
489 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
492 \begin_layout Standard
493 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
494 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
495 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
498 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
506 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
507 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
510 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
514 \begin_inset Index idx
517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
518 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
526 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
533 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
537 \begin_layout Chapter
538 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
542 \begin_layout Section
543 Basic File Operations
544 \begin_inset Index idx
547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
556 \begin_layout Standard
561 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
562 in addition to some more advanced operations:
565 \begin_layout Itemize
587 \begin_layout Itemize
603 arg "buffer-new-template"
609 \begin_layout Itemize
631 \begin_layout Itemize
639 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
643 \begin_layout Itemize
645 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
657 \begin_layout Itemize
669 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
673 \begin_layout Itemize
675 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
683 \begin_layout Itemize
705 \begin_layout Itemize
717 arg "buffer-write-as"
721 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
725 \begin_layout Itemize
727 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
743 \begin_layout Itemize
757 \begin_layout Itemize
771 \begin_layout Standard
772 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
773 a few minor differences.
776 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
787 command lists the available templates.
788 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
789 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
790 and possibly propose text fragments
792 for the document, features
793 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
796 you would otherwise need to
797 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
799 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
803 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
807 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
815 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
821 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
822 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
826 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
834 \begin_layout Standard
835 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
867 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
868 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
869 is just that — a big, blank space.
877 \begin_layout Standard
898 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
903 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
906 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
924 will reload the document from disk.
925 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
926 and want to restore it to the last save.
935 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
936 them as your changes.
939 \begin_layout Section
940 Basic Editing Features
941 \begin_inset Index idx
944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
951 \begin_inset CommandInset label
953 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
960 \begin_layout Standard
961 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
962 can perform cut and paste operations
963 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
964 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
965 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
966 editing features and how to access
968 We will start with cut and paste.
971 \begin_layout Standard
972 As you might expect, the
976 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
977 various other editing features.
978 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
982 \begin_layout Itemize
988 \begin_inset Index idx
991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1020 \begin_layout Itemize
1026 \begin_inset Index idx
1029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1058 \begin_layout Itemize
1064 \begin_inset Index idx
1067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1092 \begin_layout Itemize
1096 \begin_inset space ~
1102 \begin_layout Itemize
1106 \begin_inset space ~
1112 \begin_layout Itemize
1116 \begin_inset space ~
1120 \begin_inset space ~
1126 \begin_inset Index idx
1129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1138 \begin_inset Index idx
1141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1156 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1166 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1172 \begin_layout Standard
1173 The first three are self-explanatory.
1174 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1175 and other programs by
1196 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1197 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1202 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1203 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1204 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1205 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1206 into individual cells.
1210 \begin_inset space ~
1215 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1216 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1220 \begin_layout Standard
1224 \begin_inset space ~
1229 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1231 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1233 \begin_inset space ~
1240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1246 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1247 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1248 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1250 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1254 \begin_inset space \space{}
1257 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1258 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1261 \begin_inset space ~
1264 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1266 \begin_inset space ~
1270 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1274 \begin_inset space ~
1283 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1284 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1286 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1290 \begin_inset space ~
1295 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1296 start a new paragraph.
1297 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1298 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1303 \begin_inset space ~
1306 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1312 \begin_inset space ~
1320 \begin_inset space ~
1323 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1326 paste from the primary selection.
1327 This is normally the currently selected text.
1330 \begin_layout Standard
1333 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1335 \begin_inset space ~
1339 \begin_inset space ~
1347 \begin_inset space ~
1351 \begin_inset space ~
1357 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1363 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1366 \begin_inset space ~
1375 \begin_inset space ~
1380 button to skip the current word.
1384 \begin_inset space ~
1389 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1393 \begin_inset space ~
1398 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1400 If the toggle is set, searching for
1401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1412 will not match the word
1413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1427 Match whole words only
1429 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1430 to only find complete words, e.
1431 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1460 offers also an advanced
1463 \begin_inset space ~
1467 \begin_inset space ~
1472 feature that is described in section
1473 \begin_inset space ~
1477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1479 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1486 \begin_layout Standard
1487 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1488 \begin_inset space \space{}
1492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1500 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1502 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1507 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1514 \begin_layout Standard
1518 arg "inset-select-all"
1521 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1522 When the cursor is inside an inset
1525 arg "inset-select-all"
1528 selects the content of the inset.
1532 arg "inset-select-all"
1535 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1540 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1543 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1547 \begin_layout Section
1549 \begin_inset Index idx
1552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1559 \begin_inset Index idx
1562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1569 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1571 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1578 \begin_layout Standard
1579 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1581 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1584 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1587 or the toolbar button
1593 to undo some mistake.
1594 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1596 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1599 or the toolbar button
1606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1613 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1614 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1617 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1620 \begin_layout Standard
1621 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1630 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1631 This is a consequence of the 100
1632 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1635 step undo limit mentioned above.
1638 \begin_layout Standard
1647 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1649 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1653 \begin_layout Section
1655 \begin_inset Index idx
1658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1667 \begin_layout Standard
1668 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1671 \begin_layout Enumerate
1676 \begin_layout Itemize
1681 once anywhere in the edit window.
1682 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1686 \begin_layout Enumerate
1691 \begin_layout Itemize
1698 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1701 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1704 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1705 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1708 \begin_layout Itemize
1709 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1712 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1719 \begin_layout Enumerate
1720 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1724 \begin_layout Standard
1725 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1726 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1730 \begin_layout Section
1732 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1734 name "sec:Navigating"
1739 \begin_inset Index idx
1742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1751 \begin_layout Standard
1753 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1756 \begin_layout Itemize
1761 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1762 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1765 \begin_layout Itemize
1766 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1768 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1770 \begin_inset space ~
1775 or by the toolbar button
1778 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1784 \begin_layout Itemize
1785 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1787 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1790 and use the same menu to return to them.
1791 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1794 \begin_layout Standard
1798 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1803 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1804 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1806 \begin_inset space ~
1811 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1812 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1813 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1814 your last editing position.
1817 \begin_layout Standard
1822 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1826 \begin_layout Subsection
1828 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1830 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1835 \begin_inset Index idx
1838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1839 Navigating ! Outline
1845 \begin_inset Index idx
1848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1857 \begin_layout Standard
1858 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1859 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1860 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1862 \begin_inset space ~
1866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1868 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1872 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1873 \begin_inset space ~
1877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1879 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1884 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1888 \begin_layout Standard
1889 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1890 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1891 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1892 dialog and to modify the citation.
1895 \begin_layout Standard
1900 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1901 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1903 Labels and References
1905 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1914 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1917 \begin_layout Standard
1918 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1919 you further to control the display.
1924 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1925 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1931 option keeps it in the current view state.
1932 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1933 \begin_inset space ~
1936 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1937 \begin_inset space ~
1940 3, the subsections of sections
1941 \begin_inset space ~
1944 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1949 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1950 \begin_inset space ~
1954 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1964 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1967 \begin_layout Standard
1974 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1975 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1989 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1990 So, for example, you can move section
1991 \begin_inset space ~
1995 \begin_inset space ~
1998 2.4 or after section
1999 \begin_inset space ~
2004 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2017 (or the corresponding key bindings
2025 ) you can change the level of sections.
2026 So you can for example make section
2027 \begin_inset space ~
2031 \begin_inset space ~
2035 \begin_inset space ~
2041 \begin_layout Standard
2042 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2043 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2046 \begin_layout Subsection
2047 Horizontal Scrolling
2048 \begin_inset Index idx
2051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2052 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2060 \begin_layout Standard
2062 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
2064 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2068 \begin_inset space \space{}
2072 \begin_inset space ~
2075 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
2076 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
2077 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2081 \begin_layout Standard
2082 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2086 \begin_layout Itemize
2088 is used on a small tablet computer
2091 \begin_layout Itemize
2092 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2104 \begin_inset space ~
2117 \begin_layout Itemize
2118 Math constructs with long command names
2121 \begin_layout Standard
2122 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2123 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2125 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2126 windows so that table
2127 \begin_inset space ~
2131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2133 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2138 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2140 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2141 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2144 \begin_layout Standard
2145 \begin_inset Float table
2152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2153 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2156 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2158 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2162 Horizontal scrolling test.
2170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2172 \begin_inset Tabular
2173 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2174 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2175 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2176 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2177 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2219 \begin_layout Section
2220 Input/Word Completion
2221 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2223 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2228 \begin_inset Index idx
2231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2238 \begin_inset Index idx
2241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2272 \begin_layout Standard
2274 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2276 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2277 is used to propose completions.
2280 \begin_layout Standard
2281 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2284 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2289 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2296 \begin_inset space ~
2300 \begin_inset space ~
2305 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2309 \begin_inset space ~
2314 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2315 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2319 \begin_inset space ~
2325 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2326 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2327 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2328 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2331 \begin_layout Standard
2333 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2334 completions available.
2339 key to accept a proposed completion.
2340 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2341 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2342 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2349 \begin_layout Standard
2350 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2351 ing options for text.
2353 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2355 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2357 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2360 he special math option
2364 enables characters to be composed.
2365 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2366 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2369 , you can then input the characters
2370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2381 to a formula to get it.
2382 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2383 of the math toolbar.
2384 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2388 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2389 's installation folder.
2391 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2392 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2399 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2404 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2405 In the example above,
2410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2442 \begin_layout Section
2444 \begin_inset Index idx
2447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2454 \begin_inset Index idx
2457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2486 \begin_inset Index idx
2489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2520 \begin_layout Standard
2521 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2535 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2538 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2542 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2543 \begin_inset space ~
2547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2549 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2556 \begin_layout Standard
2560 \begin_inset space ~
2568 \begin_inset space ~
2589 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2593 \begin_layout Labeling
2594 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2598 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2599 LatexCommand nomenclature
2601 description "Tabulator key"
2608 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2610 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2611 \begin_inset space ~
2615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2617 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2624 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2628 , especially section
2629 \begin_inset space ~
2633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2635 reference "subsec:Lists"
2641 If you are still confused, look in the
2646 \begin_inset Newline newline
2654 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2655 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2659 \begin_layout Labeling
2660 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2664 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2665 LatexCommand nomenclature
2667 description "Escape key"
2675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2682 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2683 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2686 \begin_layout Labeling
2687 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2693 \begin_inset space ~
2697 \begin_inset space ~
2704 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2705 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2709 \begin_layout Standard
2710 There are three modifier keys:
2713 \begin_layout Labeling
2714 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2732 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2733 LatexCommand nomenclature
2735 description "Control key"
2740 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2741 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2745 \begin_layout Itemize
2754 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2757 \begin_layout Itemize
2766 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2769 \begin_layout Itemize
2778 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2782 \begin_layout Labeling
2783 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2801 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2802 LatexCommand nomenclature
2804 description "Shift key"
2809 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2810 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2813 \begin_layout Labeling
2814 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2832 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2833 LatexCommand nomenclature
2835 description "Alt or Meta key"
2840 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2841 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2842 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2848 \begin_inset Newline newline
2851 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2853 menu accelerator keys
2856 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2857 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2861 \begin_layout Standard
2862 For example, the sequence
2863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2869 \begin_inset space ~
2873 \begin_inset space ~
2879 \begin_inset space ~
2887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2906 \begin_inset space ~
2912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2922 \begin_layout Standard
2927 manual lists all other things bound to the
2935 \begin_layout Standard
2936 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2938 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2939 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2940 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2941 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2942 The \SpecialChar LyX
2943 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2944 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2945 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2947 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2963 followed by a capital
2970 \begin_layout Chapter
2973 \begin_inset Index idx
2976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2986 \begin_layout Section
2988 \begin_inset Index idx
2991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3000 \begin_layout Subsection
3004 \begin_layout Standard
3005 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3006 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3007 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3008 numbering schemes, and so on.
3009 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3010 and format the title of your document differently.
3013 \begin_layout Standard
3018 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3019 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3020 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3021 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3022 picks one for you by default.
3023 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3026 \begin_layout Subsection
3028 \begin_inset Index idx
3031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3038 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3040 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3047 \begin_layout Standard
3048 You can select a class using the
3050 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3051 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3055 \begin_inset Index idx
3058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3065 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3069 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3073 \begin_layout Standard
3074 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3079 \begin_layout Description
3080 Article for basic articles
3083 \begin_layout Description
3084 Report for basic reports
3087 \begin_layout Description
3088 Book for writing a book
3091 \begin_layout Description
3092 Letter for US-style letters
3095 \begin_layout Standard
3096 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3097 only uses if you have installed
3098 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3099 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3100 distributions will include
3102 Here are some of the classes.
3103 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3105 Special Document Classes
3114 \begin_layout Description
3115 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3118 \begin_layout Description
3119 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3123 \begin_layout Description
3124 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3128 \begin_layout Description
3129 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3130 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3131 There are three article layouts available.
3132 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3133 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3134 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3135 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3140 sequential numbering
3141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3144 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3145 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3146 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3147 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3150 \begin_layout Description
3151 Beamer Layout for presentations
3154 \begin_layout Description
3155 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3156 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3157 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3158 with \SpecialChar LyX
3162 \begin_layout Description
3163 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3166 \begin_layout Description
3168 \begin_inset space ~
3171 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3174 \begin_layout Description
3175 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3178 \begin_layout Description
3179 Foils Used to make transparencies
3182 \begin_layout Description
3183 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3184 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3185 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3186 with \SpecialChar LyX
3190 \begin_layout Description
3191 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3192 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3195 \begin_layout Description
3196 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3199 \begin_layout Description
3200 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3203 \begin_layout Description
3204 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3205 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3206 (Is used by this document.)
3209 \begin_layout Description
3210 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3213 \begin_layout Description
3214 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3217 \begin_layout Description
3222 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3223 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3225 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3229 \begin_layout Description
3230 Slides Used to make transparencies
3233 \begin_layout Description
3235 \begin_inset space ~
3238 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3239 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3242 \begin_layout Description
3243 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3246 \begin_layout Standard
3247 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3249 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3251 Special Document Classes
3258 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3259 of the document classes.
3262 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3266 \begin_layout Standard
3267 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3269 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3270 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3272 \begin_inset Index idx
3275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3292 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3293 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3295 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3298 \begin_layout Standard
3301 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3306 , are highly specialized.
3308 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3309 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3310 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3311 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3312 by some document class.
3313 There are just too many of them.
3314 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3317 \begin_layout Standard
3318 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3326 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3327 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3328 document class for a new file.
3330 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3333 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3340 manual for information on how to install them.
3341 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3347 \begin_layout Standard
3348 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3349 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3350 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3351 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3352 class files to be used for dissertation
3353 s submitted to those universities.
3354 The \SpecialChar LyX
3355 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3357 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3361 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3367 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3370 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3372 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3374 name "subsec:Modules"
3379 \begin_inset Index idx
3382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3391 \begin_layout Standard
3392 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3393 chosen document class.
3394 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3395 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3402 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3406 \begin_inset Index idx
3409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3416 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3420 \begin_layout Standard
3421 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3422 packages or file format converters that are not always
3423 installed by default.
3425 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3426 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3427 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3428 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3430 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3431 file without the missing prerequisites.
3432 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3433 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3436 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3440 \begin_inset Index idx
3443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3444 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3450 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3455 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3458 \begin_layout Standard
3459 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3467 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3469 will advise you about these things.
3477 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3481 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3486 \begin_inset Index idx
3489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3490 Document ! Local Layout
3498 \begin_layout Standard
3499 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3500 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3501 : They are intended to be used in
3502 a variety of different documents.
3503 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3504 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3505 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3506 need a specific inset or
3507 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3509 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757388
3512 style only that one time.
3513 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3515 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3533 manual for information on how to use it.
3536 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3540 \begin_layout Standard
3541 Each class has a default set of options.
3542 Here's a quick table describing them:
3545 \begin_layout Standard
3546 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3552 \begin_layout Standard
3554 \begin_inset Tabular
3555 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3556 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3557 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3558 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3559 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3560 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3561 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4015 \begin_layout Standard
4016 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4022 \begin_layout Standard
4023 You're probably also wondering what
4024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4028 \begin_inset space ~
4032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4036 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4037 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4042 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4047 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4057 headings, there are also
4065 headings, and so on.
4066 We will describe these headings fully in section
4067 \begin_inset space ~
4071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4073 reference "subsec:Headings"
4080 \begin_layout Subsection
4082 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4084 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4089 \begin_inset Index idx
4092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4099 \begin_inset Index idx
4102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4111 \begin_layout Standard
4112 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4114 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4121 \begin_inset space ~
4129 \begin_inset space ~
4134 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4136 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4137 doesn't support special options you want to
4138 use for your document.
4139 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4140 -class and its options, you have to read
4144 \begin_layout Standard
4148 \begin_inset space ~
4155 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4161 \begin_inset space ~
4166 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4167 You can choose between the following five options:
4170 \begin_layout Labeling
4171 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4176 Use default page style of current class.
4179 \begin_layout Labeling
4180 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4185 No page numbers or headings.
4188 \begin_layout Labeling
4189 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4197 \begin_layout Labeling
4198 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4203 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4204 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4205 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4206 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4209 \begin_layout Labeling
4210 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4215 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4216 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4222 \begin_inset Index idx
4225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4233 How they are defined is explained in section
4234 \begin_inset space ~
4238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4240 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4247 \begin_layout Standard
4248 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4249 \begin_inset space ~
4253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4255 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4262 \begin_layout Subsection
4263 Paper Size and Orientation
4264 \begin_inset Index idx
4267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4268 Document ! Paper size
4274 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4276 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4283 \begin_layout Standard
4284 You can find the following options in the menu
4287 \begin_inset space ~
4294 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4298 \begin_inset Index idx
4301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4310 \begin_layout Labeling
4311 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4315 \begin_inset space ~
4320 What size paper to print on.
4325 \begin_layout Itemize
4331 \begin_layout Itemize
4337 \begin_layout Itemize
4343 \begin_layout Itemize
4349 \begin_layout Itemize
4352 US letter, US legal, US executive
4355 \begin_layout Itemize
4361 \begin_layout Itemize
4368 \begin_layout Labeling
4369 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4374 To choose whether to output as
4385 \begin_layout Labeling
4386 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4390 \begin_inset space ~
4395 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4396 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4399 \begin_layout Subsection
4401 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4403 name "subsec:Margins"
4408 \begin_inset Index idx
4411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4418 \begin_inset Index idx
4421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4430 \begin_layout Standard
4431 Paper margins are set in the menu
4433 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4437 \begin_inset Index idx
4440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4449 \begin_layout Standard
4450 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4451 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4452 the paper format and the font size into account.
4455 \begin_layout Subsection
4459 \begin_layout Standard
4460 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4466 That includes the paragraph environments.
4467 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4468 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4469 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4471 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4480 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4482 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4483 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4484 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4487 \begin_layout Section
4488 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4489 \begin_inset Index idx
4492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4493 Paragraph ! Indentation
4501 \begin_layout Subsection
4503 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4505 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4512 \begin_layout Standard
4513 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4514 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4517 \begin_layout Standard
4518 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4519 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4520 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4521 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4525 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4531 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4532 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4533 language than English.
4535 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4538 \begin_layout Standard
4539 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4540 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4541 into \SpecialChar LyX
4543 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4546 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4548 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4549 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4550 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4557 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4558 goes to produce a printable file.
4563 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4565 gives you the ability globally to change
4569 these pre-coded spacings.
4570 We will explain more later.
4573 \begin_layout Subsection
4574 Paragraph Separation
4575 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4577 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4582 \begin_inset Index idx
4585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4586 Paragraph ! Separation
4594 \begin_layout Standard
4602 \begin_inset space ~
4610 \begin_inset space ~
4617 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4621 \begin_inset Index idx
4624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4630 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4633 \begin_layout Subsection
4637 \begin_layout Standard
4638 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4641 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4643 \begin_inset space ~
4648 dialog and toggle the
4651 \begin_inset space ~
4656 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4659 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4663 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4664 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4668 \begin_layout Standard
4669 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4670 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4673 \begin_layout Subsection
4675 \begin_inset Index idx
4678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4679 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4687 \begin_layout Standard
4690 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4694 \begin_inset Index idx
4697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4706 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4710 \begin_inset space ~
4719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4720 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4726 \begin_inset Index idx
4729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4736 installed to use this feature.
4741 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4743 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4745 \begin_inset space ~
4750 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4751 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4754 \begin_layout Section
4755 Paragraph Environments
4756 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4758 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4763 \begin_inset Index idx
4766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4767 Paragraph ! Environments
4773 \begin_inset Index idx
4776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4777 Paragraph environments|(
4785 \begin_layout Subsection
4789 \begin_layout Standard
4790 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4793 \begin_layout Standard
4802 } \SpecialChar ldots
4812 \begin_inset Newline newline
4815 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4817 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4818 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4819 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4828 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4831 \begin_layout Standard
4832 A paragraph environment is simply a
4833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4840 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4841 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4842 scheme, labels, and so on.
4843 Additionally, you can
4844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4851 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4852 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4853 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4854 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4856 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4858 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4861 \begin_layout Standard
4862 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4863 \begin_inset Graphics
4864 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4870 at the left end of the toolbar.
4872 will change the environment of the
4876 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4877 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4878 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4882 \begin_layout Standard
4891 create a new paragraph using the
4895 paragraph environment.
4897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4904 because if you are in one of these environments:
4907 \begin_layout Itemize
4913 \begin_layout Itemize
4919 \begin_layout Itemize
4925 \begin_layout Itemize
4931 \begin_layout Itemize
4937 \begin_layout Itemize
4943 \begin_layout Itemize
4949 \begin_layout Standard
4951 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4955 , rather than resetting it to
4960 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4961 \begin_inset space ~
4965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4967 reference "sec:Nesting"
4974 \begin_layout Subsection
4978 \begin_layout Standard
4979 The default paragraph environment is
4984 It creates a plain paragraph.
4986 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4987 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4988 this manual) are in the
4995 \begin_layout Standard
4996 You can nest a paragraph using the
5000 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5008 \begin_layout Subsection
5010 \begin_inset Index idx
5013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5022 \begin_layout Standard
5023 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5024 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5033 for thanks or contact information.
5034 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5035 places all of this on a separate page
5036 along with today's date.
5037 For other types of documents, the title
5038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5045 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5049 \begin_layout Standard
5051 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5065 Here's how you use them:
5068 \begin_layout Itemize
5069 Put the title of your document in the
5076 \begin_layout Itemize
5077 Put the author name in the
5084 \begin_layout Itemize
5085 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5086 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5092 Note that using this environment is optional.
5093 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5094 will automatically insert today's date.
5095 If you don't want a date, use the option
5097 Suppress default date on front page
5101 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5102 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5104 \begin_inset space ~
5112 \begin_layout Standard
5113 You can use footnotes to insert
5114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5121 or contact information.
5124 \begin_layout Subsection
5126 \begin_inset Index idx
5129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5136 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5138 name "subsec:Headings"
5145 \begin_layout Standard
5146 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5148 takes care of the numbering for you.
5151 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5153 \begin_inset Index idx
5156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5157 Section headings ! Numbered
5165 \begin_layout Standard
5166 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5170 \begin_layout Enumerate
5176 \begin_layout Enumerate
5182 \begin_layout Enumerate
5188 \begin_layout Enumerate
5194 \begin_layout Enumerate
5200 \begin_layout Enumerate
5206 \begin_layout Enumerate
5212 \begin_layout Standard
5214 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5215 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5216 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5219 \begin_layout Standard
5220 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5221 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5222 You group the book into chapters.
5224 does a similar grouping:
5227 \begin_layout Itemize
5232 is divided into either
5243 \begin_layout Itemize
5255 \begin_layout Itemize
5267 \begin_layout Itemize
5279 \begin_layout Itemize
5291 \begin_layout Itemize
5303 \begin_layout Standard
5304 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5312 Not all document types use the
5316 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5321 is the top-level heading.
5329 \begin_layout Standard
5334 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5335 labels it with its number,
5336 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5338 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5350 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5352 \begin_inset Index idx
5355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5356 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5364 \begin_layout Standard
5365 The unnumbered section headings have a
5366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5373 at the end of their name.
5374 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5375 the table of contents, see section
5376 \begin_inset space ~
5380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5389 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5390 Changing the Numbering
5391 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5393 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5400 \begin_layout Standard
5401 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5402 in the Table of Contents.
5403 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5405 Just as certain classes start with
5419 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5429 This is something you can change.
5432 \begin_layout Standard
5435 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5439 \begin_inset Index idx
5442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5451 \begin_inset space ~
5455 \begin_inset space ~
5460 you will see two counters.
5465 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5466 numbers a section heading.
5467 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5471 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5472 Short Titles of Headings
5473 \begin_inset Index idx
5476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5477 Section headings ! Short titles
5483 \begin_inset Argument 1
5486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5493 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5495 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5502 \begin_layout Standard
5503 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5504 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5505 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5506 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5509 \begin_layout Standard
5511 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5512 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5513 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5514 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5517 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5519 \begin_inset space ~
5525 This will insert a box labeled
5526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5530 \begin_inset space ~
5534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5537 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5538 This also works for captions inside floats.
5539 There can only be one short title per title.
5542 \begin_layout Standard
5543 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5546 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5550 \begin_layout Standard
5551 The following information applies to all section headings:
5554 \begin_layout Itemize
5555 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5558 \begin_layout Itemize
5559 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5562 \begin_layout Itemize
5563 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5566 \begin_layout Itemize
5567 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5570 \begin_layout Subsection
5574 \begin_layout Standard
5576 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5590 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5591 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5592 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5593 the text they contain.
5594 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5602 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5605 \begin_layout Standard
5606 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5615 when you start a new paragraph.
5616 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5620 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5621 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5622 have to change back to the
5626 environment yourself.
5629 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5631 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5638 \begin_inset Index idx
5641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5650 \begin_layout Standard
5651 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5652 time for the differences.
5661 are identical except for one difference:
5665 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5674 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5677 \begin_layout Standard
5678 Here's an example of the
5691 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5693 See – no indentation!
5697 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5698 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5699 the other paragraph.
5702 \begin_layout Standard
5703 Here's another example, this time in the
5710 \begin_layout Quotation
5716 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5717 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5718 the first line, then
5722 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5726 you were quoting other text.
5729 \begin_layout Quotation
5730 Here's a new paragraph.
5731 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5732 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5735 \begin_layout Standard
5736 As the examples show,
5740 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5741 They should put quotes in the
5746 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5750 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5753 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5755 \begin_inset Index idx
5758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5765 \begin_inset Index idx
5768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5775 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5784 \begin_layout Standard
5789 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5795 \begin_inset Newline newline
5798 Which I did not rehearse!
5802 It could be much worse.
5803 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5805 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5806 indented a bit more than the first.
5807 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5813 \begin_inset Newline newline
5816 And make things look fine
5817 \begin_inset Newline newline
5823 arg "newline-insert newline"
5829 \begin_layout Standard
5834 does not indent both margins.
5835 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5836 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5839 arg "newline-insert newline"
5845 \begin_layout Subsection
5847 \begin_inset Index idx
5850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5866 \begin_layout Standard
5868 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5878 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5879 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5888 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5889 lets you provide your own label.
5890 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5891 describing some general features of all four of them.
5894 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5898 \begin_layout Standard
5899 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5901 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5902 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5911 reset the environment to
5915 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5916 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5917 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5921 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5925 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5932 \begin_layout Standard
5933 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5934 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5935 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5937 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5938 you read all of section
5939 \begin_inset space ~
5943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5945 reference "sec:Nesting"
5952 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5954 \begin_inset Index idx
5957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5973 \begin_layout Standard
5974 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5978 paragraph environment.
5979 It has the following properties:
5982 \begin_layout Itemize
5983 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5987 \begin_layout Itemize
5989 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5992 \begin_layout Itemize
5993 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5997 \begin_layout Itemize
5998 The items can have any length.
6000 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6001 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6008 \begin_layout Itemize
6013 environment inside another
6017 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6021 \begin_layout Itemize
6022 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6025 \begin_layout Itemize
6027 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6030 \begin_layout Itemize
6032 \begin_inset space ~
6036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6038 reference "sec:Nesting"
6042 for a full explanation of nesting.
6046 \begin_layout Standard
6047 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6056 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6059 \begin_layout Standard
6060 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6061 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6064 \begin_layout Itemize
6065 The label for the first level
6069 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6073 \begin_layout Itemize
6074 The label for the second level is a dash.
6078 \begin_layout Itemize
6079 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6083 \begin_layout Itemize
6084 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6088 \begin_layout Itemize
6089 Back out to the third level.
6093 \begin_layout Itemize
6094 Back to the second level.
6098 \begin_layout Itemize
6099 Back to the outermost level.
6102 \begin_layout Standard
6103 These are the default labels for an
6108 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6110 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6113 dialog in the submenu
6118 \begin_inset Index idx
6121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6127 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6131 \begin_layout Standard
6132 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6133 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6135 \begin_inset space ~
6139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6141 reference "sec:Nesting"
6148 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6150 \begin_inset Index idx
6153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6160 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6162 name "sec:Enumerate"
6169 \begin_layout Standard
6174 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6175 It has these properties:
6178 \begin_layout Enumerate
6179 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6183 \begin_layout Enumerate
6184 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6188 \begin_layout Enumerate
6190 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6193 \begin_layout Enumerate
6198 environment resets the counter to one.
6201 \begin_layout Enumerate
6214 \begin_layout Enumerate
6215 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6216 Items can have any length.
6219 \begin_layout Enumerate
6220 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6223 \begin_layout Enumerate
6224 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6227 \begin_layout Enumerate
6228 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6232 \begin_layout Standard
6241 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6243 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6244 labels the four different levels in an
6251 \begin_layout Enumerate
6252 The first level of an
6256 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6260 \begin_layout Enumerate
6261 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6265 \begin_layout Enumerate
6266 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6270 \begin_layout Enumerate
6271 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6274 \begin_layout Enumerate
6275 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6280 \begin_layout Enumerate
6281 Back to the third level
6285 \begin_layout Enumerate
6286 Back to the second level.
6290 \begin_layout Enumerate
6291 Back to the outermost level.
6294 \begin_layout Standard
6295 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6299 environment, see section
6300 \begin_inset space ~
6304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6306 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6311 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6315 \begin_layout Standard
6316 There is more to nesting
6320 environments than we've stated here.
6321 You should read section
6322 \begin_inset space ~
6326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6328 reference "sec:Nesting"
6332 to learn more about nesting.
6335 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6337 \begin_inset Index idx
6340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6349 \begin_layout Standard
6350 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6354 list has no fixed label.
6355 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6364 of the first line as the label.
6368 \begin_layout Description
6369 Example: This is an example of the
6376 \begin_layout Standard
6378 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6382 \begin_layout Standard
6384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6391 it is meant that the first usage of the
6395 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6397 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6405 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6410 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6411 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6413 \begin_inset space ~
6419 \begin_inset space ~
6423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6425 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6429 for more information.) Here is an example:
6432 \begin_layout Description
6434 \begin_inset space ~
6437 Example: This one shows how to use a
6440 \begin_inset space ~
6452 \begin_layout Description
6453 Usage: You should use the
6457 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6458 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6460 It's not a good idea to use a
6464 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6465 You're better off using
6477 paragraphs into them.
6480 \begin_layout Description
6481 Nesting: You can nest
6485 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6489 \begin_layout Standard
6490 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6491 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6492 them from the first line.
6495 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6497 \begin_inset Index idx
6500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6509 \begin_layout Standard
6514 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6515 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6519 \begin_layout Standard
6528 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6530 Here are its properties:
6533 \begin_layout Labeling
6534 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6536 \begin_inset space ~
6539 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6548 of each line as the item label.
6553 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6554 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6555 space as described above.
6558 \begin_layout Labeling
6559 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6560 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6561 uses different margins for the item label and the
6562 body of the item text.
6563 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6564 label width plus a little extra space.
6568 \begin_layout Labeling
6569 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6571 \begin_inset space ~
6574 width \SpecialChar LyX
6575 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6576 If the label width is larger, the label
6577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6584 into the first line.
6585 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6586 margin of the rest of the item text.
6589 \begin_layout Labeling
6590 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6592 \begin_inset space ~
6595 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6600 environment has the same left margin.
6601 \begin_inset Newline newline
6604 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6607 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6609 \begin_inset space ~
6614 dialog (toolbar button
6617 arg "layout-paragraph"
6624 \begin_inset space ~
6629 determines the default label width.
6630 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6639 multiple times instead.
6640 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6650 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6653 \begin_inset space ~
6658 every time you alter a label in a
6663 \begin_inset Newline newline
6666 The predefined default width is the length of
6667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6675 \begin_inset space ~
6681 \begin_layout Standard
6686 list the same way as the
6690 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6696 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6700 \begin_layout Standard
6705 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6706 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6708 \begin_inset space ~
6712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6714 reference "sec:Nesting"
6718 to learn about nesting.
6721 \begin_layout Standard
6722 There is yet another feature of the
6726 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6727 left-justifies the item labels by
6729 You can use additional
6733 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6734 justifies the item label.
6739 are documented in section
6740 \begin_inset space ~
6744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6746 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6751 Here are some examples:
6754 \begin_layout Labeling
6755 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6756 Left The default for
6763 \begin_layout Labeling
6764 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6765 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6772 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6775 \begin_layout Labeling
6776 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6777 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6781 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6788 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6791 \begin_layout Subsection
6793 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6795 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6800 \begin_inset Index idx
6803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6812 \begin_layout Standard
6813 The features described in this section require that the module
6815 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6817 is loaded in the document settings.
6818 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6824 \begin_inset Index idx
6827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6837 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6838 Custom Enumerate Lists
6839 \begin_inset Index idx
6842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6843 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6851 \begin_layout Standard
6853 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6856 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6859 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6860 There you add the command
6863 \begin_layout Standard
6871 \begin_layout Standard
6883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6884 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6885 Code, look at section
6886 \begin_inset space ~
6890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6892 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6905 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6912 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6913 For capital Roman numerals replace
6925 in the command above.
6926 For Arabic numerals use
6934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6941 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6956 \begin_layout Standard
6958 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6966 You can only number 26
6967 \begin_inset space ~
6970 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6978 \begin_layout Standard
6979 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6980 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6983 \begin_layout Standard
6984 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6987 \begin_layout Enumerate
6988 \begin_inset Argument 1
6991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7017 \begin_layout Enumerate
7018 \begin_inset Argument 1
7021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7044 \begin_layout Enumerate
7049 \begin_layout Enumerate
7050 \begin_inset Argument 1
7053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7077 \begin_layout Enumerate
7078 \begin_inset Argument 1
7081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7107 \begin_layout Standard
7108 For this list these commands were used:
7111 \begin_layout Standard
7122 \begin_inset Newline newline
7130 \begin_inset Newline newline
7138 \begin_inset Newline newline
7148 \begin_layout Standard
7155 makes the label emphasized and
7164 \begin_layout Standard
7165 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7173 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7174 lists until you change the definition.
7182 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7184 \begin_inset Index idx
7187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7188 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7196 \begin_layout Standard
7197 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7200 \begin_layout Enumerate
7201 \begin_inset Argument 1
7204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7223 \begin_inset Note Note
7226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7227 goes back to default numbering
7235 \begin_layout Enumerate
7239 \begin_layout Standard
7243 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7247 \begin_layout Standard
7248 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7253 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7254 to indicate that it is a resumed
7255 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7256 , but in the output.
7259 \begin_layout Standard
7260 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7268 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7277 \begin_layout Standard
7278 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7280 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7281 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7282 of a normal enumeration.
7283 There, insert the command
7286 \begin_layout Standard
7292 \begin_layout Standard
7297 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7301 \begin_layout Enumerate
7305 \begin_layout Enumerate
7309 \begin_layout Standard
7310 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7313 \begin_layout Enumerate
7314 \begin_inset Argument 1
7317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7333 This enumeration starts at 4
7336 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7338 \begin_inset Index idx
7341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7350 \begin_layout Standard
7351 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7353 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7356 \begin_layout Itemize
7360 \begin_layout Itemize
7361 with standard spacing
7364 \begin_layout Standard
7365 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7367 Add there the command
7371 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7374 \begin_layout Itemize
7375 \begin_inset Argument 1
7378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7397 \begin_layout Itemize
7401 \begin_layout Itemize
7405 \begin_layout Standard
7406 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7413 \begin_inset Index idx
7416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7424 For more information see its documentation,
7425 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7435 \begin_layout Standard
7436 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7438 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7439 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7440 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7443 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7446 \begin_layout Enumerate
7447 \begin_inset Argument 1
7450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7458 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7471 \begin_layout Enumerate
7472 with negative indentation
7475 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7476 Further Customization
7477 \begin_inset Index idx
7480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7481 Lists ! Customization
7489 \begin_layout Standard
7490 You can also change the style of description lists.
7494 \begin_layout Standard
7500 \begin_layout Standard
7501 changes the description label font, the command
7504 \begin_layout Standard
7510 \begin_layout Standard
7511 sets the list style.
7514 \begin_layout Standard
7515 An example where the command
7518 \begin_layout Standard
7523 itshape, style=nextline
7526 \begin_layout Standard
7530 \begin_layout Description
7532 \begin_inset space ~
7536 \begin_inset Argument 1
7539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7545 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7547 itshape, style=nextline
7557 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7558 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7562 \begin_layout Description
7564 \begin_inset space ~
7567 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7568 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7569 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7572 \begin_layout Standard
7573 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7579 \begin_inset Index idx
7582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7590 For more information see its documentation
7591 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7601 \begin_layout Subsection
7603 \begin_inset Index idx
7606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7615 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7617 \begin_inset space ~
7620 Address: An Overview
7623 \begin_layout Standard
7624 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7625 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7633 \begin_inset space ~
7639 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7640 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7641 gags on the document.
7642 In contrast, you can use the
7649 \begin_inset space ~
7654 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7655 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7659 \begin_layout Standard
7660 Of course, you're not limited to using
7667 \begin_inset space ~
7676 \begin_inset space ~
7681 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7682 some European academic papers.
7685 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7687 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7689 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7696 \begin_layout Standard
7701 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7702 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7706 \begin_inset space ~
7711 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7712 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7713 Here's an example of each:
7716 \begin_layout Right Address
7718 \begin_inset Newline newline
7722 \begin_inset Newline newline
7726 \begin_inset Newline newline
7729 When is it? What is today?
7732 \begin_layout Standard
7736 \begin_inset space ~
7742 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7744 the largest block of text on a single line.
7745 Here's an example of the
7752 \begin_layout Address
7754 \begin_inset Newline newline
7757 Where do I send this
7758 \begin_inset Newline newline
7761 Your post office and country
7764 \begin_layout Standard
7765 As you can see, both
7772 \begin_inset space ~
7777 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7782 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7783 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7789 This makes sense, since
7797 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7798 Thus, you have to use
7805 arg "newline-insert newline"
7810 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7811 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7813 \begin_inset space ~
7817 \begin_inset space ~
7822 ) to start a new line in an
7829 \begin_inset space ~
7837 \begin_layout Subsection
7841 \begin_layout Standard
7842 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7843 or list of references.
7845 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7848 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7850 \begin_inset Index idx
7853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7862 \begin_layout Standard
7867 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7868 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7869 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7870 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7884 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7885 The book document classes ignores the
7889 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7893 in a letter document class.
7896 \begin_layout Standard
7901 environment does several things for you.
7902 First, it puts the centered label
7903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7911 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7913 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7914 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7915 the subsequent text.
7916 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7918 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7922 \begin_layout Standard
7923 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7927 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7928 The new paragraph will still be in the
7933 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7934 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7937 \begin_layout Standard
7938 \begin_inset Float figure
7945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7947 \begin_inset Graphics
7948 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7956 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7959 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7961 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7982 \begin_layout Standard
7983 We would love to demonstrate the
7987 environment, but since this document is in the
7988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7995 class, we can't do this.
7996 We inserted it therefore as figure
7997 \begin_inset space ~
8001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8003 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8008 If you have never heard of an
8009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8016 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8019 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8021 \begin_inset Index idx
8024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8031 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8033 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8040 \begin_layout Standard
8045 environment is used to list references.
8046 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8047 only use it at the end of the document.
8059 \begin_layout Standard
8060 When you first open a
8064 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8065 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8081 depending on the document class.
8082 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8083 Each paragraph of the
8087 environment is a bibliography entry.
8092 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8093 Each new paragraph is still in the
8100 \begin_layout Standard
8101 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8102 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8104 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8106 handling, have a look at section
8107 \begin_inset space ~
8111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8113 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8120 \begin_layout Subsection
8121 Special Environments
8124 \begin_layout Standard
8126 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8127 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8130 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8135 \begin_inset Index idx
8138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8146 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8148 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8155 \begin_layout Standard
8161 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8163 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8168 key as a fixed whitespace.
8172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8185 \begin_inset space ~
8190 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8208 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8211 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8214 arg "newline-insert newline"
8231 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8232 So, when you finish using the
8237 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8238 Also, you can nest the
8243 environment inside of others.
8246 \begin_layout Standard
8247 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8250 \begin_layout Itemize
8254 arg "newline-insert newline"
8257 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8262 \begin_inset space \space{}
8272 arg "newline-insert newline"
8278 \begin_layout Itemize
8282 arg "newline-insert newline"
8292 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8298 \begin_layout Itemize
8299 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8300 You must put at least one
8304 in any line you want blank.
8305 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8309 \begin_layout Itemize
8310 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8314 since that will insert
8319 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8322 arg "self-insert \""
8328 \begin_layout Standard
8332 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8336 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8340 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8344 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8348 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8349 printf("Hello World!
8354 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8358 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8362 \begin_layout Standard
8363 This is just the standard
8364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8375 \begin_layout Standard
8381 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8383 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8384 as if you used a typewriter.
8385 \begin_inset Index idx
8388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8389 Paragraph environments|)
8394 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8397 Program Code Listings
8402 \begin_inset space ~
8410 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8414 \begin_inset Index idx
8417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8426 \begin_layout Standard
8431 environment is similar to the
8436 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8437 computer console text.
8442 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8456 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8457 you can have empty lines.
8470 \begin_layout Itemize
8471 have a certain language and a text style
8474 \begin_layout Itemize
8475 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8476 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8477 and \SpecialChar TeX
8481 \begin_layout Standard
8482 Because of these properties
8486 works like a typewriter.
8490 \begin_layout Verbatim
8495 \begin_layout Verbatim
8499 The following 2 lines are empty:
8502 \begin_layout Verbatim
8506 \begin_layout Verbatim
8510 \begin_layout Verbatim
8512 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8517 \begin_layout Standard
8522 environment is identical to
8526 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8527 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8534 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8539 \begin_layout Section
8540 Nesting Environments
8541 \begin_inset Index idx
8544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8545 Nesting ! Environments
8551 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8560 \begin_layout Subsection
8564 \begin_layout Standard
8566 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8568 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8570 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8572 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8584 \begin_layout Enumerate
8588 \begin_layout Enumerate
8593 \begin_layout Enumerate
8597 \begin_layout Enumerate
8602 \begin_layout Enumerate
8606 \begin_layout Standard
8607 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8608 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8610 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8612 \begin_inset space ~
8616 \begin_inset space ~
8624 \begin_inset space ~
8628 \begin_inset space ~
8633 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8635 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8638 arg "depth-increment"
8644 arg "depth-decrement"
8658 arg "depth-increment"
8664 arg "depth-decrement"
8668 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8669 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8673 \begin_layout Standard
8674 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8675 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8676 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8677 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8678 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8681 \begin_layout Standard
8682 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8684 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8686 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8689 \begin_layout Subsection
8690 What You Can and Can't Nest
8693 \begin_layout Standard
8694 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8695 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8698 \begin_layout Standard
8699 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8700 than a simple yes or no.
8701 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8704 \begin_layout Itemize
8705 Completely unnestable
8708 \begin_layout Itemize
8709 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8713 \begin_layout Itemize
8714 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8718 \begin_layout Standard
8719 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8720 environments have them:
8723 \begin_layout Description
8724 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8725 Can't nest into them.
8729 \begin_layout Itemize
8735 \begin_layout Itemize
8741 \begin_layout Itemize
8747 \begin_layout Itemize
8753 \begin_layout Itemize
8760 \begin_layout Description
8762 \begin_inset space ~
8765 Nestable You can nest them.
8766 You can nest other things into them.
8770 \begin_layout Itemize
8776 \begin_layout Itemize
8782 \begin_layout Itemize
8788 \begin_layout Itemize
8794 \begin_layout Itemize
8800 \begin_layout Itemize
8806 \begin_layout Itemize
8812 \begin_layout Itemize
8819 \begin_layout Itemize
8825 \begin_layout Itemize
8832 \begin_layout Description
8833 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8834 You can't nest anything into them.
8838 \begin_layout Itemize
8844 \begin_layout Itemize
8850 \begin_layout Itemize
8856 \begin_layout Itemize
8862 \begin_layout Itemize
8868 \begin_layout Itemize
8874 \begin_layout Itemize
8880 \begin_layout Itemize
8886 \begin_layout Itemize
8892 \begin_layout Itemize
8898 \begin_layout Itemize
8904 \begin_layout Itemize
8910 \begin_layout Itemize
8916 \begin_layout Itemize
8920 \begin_inset space ~
8926 \begin_layout Itemize
8933 \begin_layout Standard
8934 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8942 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8952 \begin_inset space ~
8955 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8956 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8957 nested section headings violate this.
8965 \begin_layout Subsection
8966 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8967 \begin_inset Index idx
8970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8971 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8979 \begin_layout Standard
8980 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8981 affected by nesting anyhow.
8985 \begin_layout Itemize
8989 \begin_layout Itemize
8993 \begin_layout Itemize
8997 \begin_layout Standard
8999 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9007 Figures and tables in
9011 are not affected by this.
9016 Have a look at section
9017 \begin_inset space ~
9021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9023 reference "sec:Floats"
9027 for more information about
9034 \begin_layout Standard
9036 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9037 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9041 \begin_layout Standard
9042 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9050 of its own, it behaves just like a
9051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9058 paragraph environment.
9059 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9063 \begin_layout Standard
9064 Here's an example with a table:
9067 \begin_layout Enumerate
9072 \begin_layout Enumerate
9073 This is (a) and it's nested.
9077 \begin_layout Standard
9078 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9084 \begin_layout Standard
9086 \begin_inset Tabular
9087 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9088 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9089 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9090 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9174 \begin_layout Standard
9175 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9182 \begin_layout Enumerate
9184 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9188 \begin_layout Enumerate
9192 \begin_layout Standard
9193 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9196 \begin_layout Enumerate
9201 \begin_layout Enumerate
9202 This is (a) and it's nested.
9206 \begin_layout Standard
9207 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9213 \begin_layout Standard
9215 \begin_inset Tabular
9216 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9217 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9218 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9219 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9303 \begin_layout Standard
9304 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9310 \begin_layout Enumerate
9317 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9320 \begin_layout Enumerate
9324 \begin_layout Standard
9325 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9329 \begin_layout Standard
9330 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9333 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9336 \begin_layout Enumerate
9341 \begin_layout Enumerate
9342 This is (a) and it's nested.
9345 \begin_layout Standard
9346 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9352 \begin_layout Standard
9354 \begin_inset Tabular
9355 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9356 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9357 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9358 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9443 \begin_layout Standard
9444 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9450 \begin_layout Enumerate
9452 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9459 \begin_layout Enumerate
9463 \begin_layout Standard
9464 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9470 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9471 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9475 \begin_layout Subsection
9476 Usage and General Features
9479 \begin_layout Standard
9480 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9481 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9490 is the innermost possible depth.
9491 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9494 \begin_layout Enumerate
9495 level #1 – outermost
9499 \begin_layout Enumerate
9504 \begin_layout Enumerate
9509 \begin_layout Enumerate
9514 \begin_layout Itemize
9519 \begin_layout Itemize
9528 \begin_layout Standard
9529 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9530 both of them in the example.
9531 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9541 For example, if we tried to nest another
9546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9553 , we would get errors.
9556 \begin_layout Subsection
9558 \begin_inset Index idx
9561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9570 \begin_layout Standard
9571 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9572 We have several examples of nested environments.
9573 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9577 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9578 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9581 \begin_layout Labeling
9582 \labelwidthstring MMM
9583 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9592 \begin_layout Labeling
9593 \labelwidthstring MMM
9594 #2-a This is level #2.
9595 We created it by using
9598 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9604 arg "depth-increment"
9611 \begin_layout Labeling
9612 \labelwidthstring MMM
9613 #3-a This is level #3.
9614 This time, we just enter
9621 arg "depth-increment"
9625 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9629 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9635 arg "depth-increment"
9642 \begin_layout Standard
9647 environment, nested inside of
9648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9656 So, it's at level #4.
9657 We did this by entering
9660 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9666 arg "depth-increment"
9669 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9674 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9690 \begin_layout Standard
9695 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9698 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9704 \begin_layout Labeling
9705 \labelwidthstring MMM
9706 #4-a This is level #4.
9710 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9713 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9718 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9722 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9727 keep nesting things inside
9728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9739 \begin_layout Labeling
9740 \labelwidthstring MMM
9741 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9746 \begin_layout Labeling
9747 \labelwidthstring MMM
9748 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9749 and this is level #6.
9750 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9754 \begin_layout Labeling
9755 \labelwidthstring MMM
9756 #5-b Back to level #5.
9760 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9766 arg "depth-decrement"
9773 \begin_layout Labeling
9774 \labelwidthstring MMM
9778 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9784 arg "depth-decrement"
9787 , we're back at level #4.
9791 \begin_layout Labeling
9792 \labelwidthstring MMM
9793 #3-b Back to level #3.
9794 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9798 \begin_layout Labeling
9799 \labelwidthstring MMM
9800 #2-b Back to level #2.
9805 \begin_layout Labeling
9806 \labelwidthstring MMM
9807 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9808 After this sentence, we will enter
9812 and change the paragraph environment back to
9819 \begin_layout Standard
9820 We could have also used the
9836 environment in place of the
9841 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9844 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9845 Example 2: Inheritance
9848 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9849 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9852 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9861 arg "depth-increment"
9865 \begin_inset Newline newline
9868 which, we will change to the
9876 \begin_layout Enumerate
9881 environment, at level #2.
9884 \begin_layout Enumerate
9885 Notice how the nested
9889 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9893 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9897 \begin_layout Standard
9898 We ended this example by entering
9903 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9907 and reset the nesting depth by using
9910 arg "depth-decrement"
9916 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9917 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9926 \begin_inset Argument 1
9929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9930 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9938 \begin_layout Enumerate
9939 This is level #1, in an
9943 paragraph environment.
9944 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9948 \begin_layout Enumerate
9953 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9959 arg "depth-increment"
9963 Now, what happens if we nest an
9967 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9968 label be? An asterisk?
9972 \begin_layout Itemize
9982 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9983 So, its label is a bullet.
9984 (We got here by using
9987 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9993 arg "depth-increment"
9996 , then changing the environment to
10004 \begin_layout Itemize
10005 Here's level #4, produced using
10008 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10014 arg "depth-increment"
10018 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10023 \begin_layout Enumerate
10025 to get to level #5.
10026 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10031 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10035 , because we are in the
10043 environment (that is, it is an
10058 \begin_layout Enumerate
10063 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10064 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10068 \begin_layout Enumerate
10069 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10072 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10075 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10078 \begin_layout Enumerate
10082 arg "depth-decrement"
10085 to decrease the depth after the next
10088 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10095 \begin_layout Enumerate
10097 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10102 \begin_layout Enumerate
10104 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10105 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10109 \begin_layout Enumerate
10110 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10119 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10124 reset the counter for the label.
10128 \begin_layout Enumerate
10132 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10138 arg "depth-decrement"
10141 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10142 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10143 into the twofold-nested
10151 \begin_layout Enumerate
10152 The same thing happens if we do another
10155 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10161 arg "depth-decrement"
10164 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10167 \begin_layout Standard
10168 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10173 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10184 The number of other
10188 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10195 The same rule applies for the
10199 environment, as well.
10202 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10203 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10206 \begin_layout Enumerate
10207 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10208 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10209 the same detail with how we did it.
10218 \begin_layout Standard
10226 arg "depth-increment"
10233 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10234 the example in parentheses someplace.
10235 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10236 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10237 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10241 \begin_layout Enumerate
10246 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10250 \begin_layout Verse
10251 Now we will add verse.
10252 \begin_inset Newline newline
10255 It will get much worse.
10256 \begin_inset Newline newline
10266 arg "depth-increment"
10276 \begin_layout Verse
10277 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10278 \begin_inset Newline newline
10281 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10282 \begin_inset Newline newline
10288 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10296 \begin_layout Verse
10297 Here comes a table:
10301 \begin_layout Standard
10302 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10308 \begin_layout Standard
10310 \begin_inset Tabular
10311 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10312 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10313 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10314 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10399 \begin_layout Verse
10403 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10413 arg "depth-increment"
10419 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10425 \begin_inset Newline newline
10433 arg "depth-decrement"
10440 \begin_layout Enumerate
10445 : level #1) This is another item.
10446 Note that selecting a
10450 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10451 3 times to put the table inside the
10459 \begin_layout Quotation
10460 We're now ending the
10464 list and changing to
10469 We're still at level #1.
10470 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10471 The next set of paragraphs is a
10472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10479 We will nest both the
10486 \begin_inset space ~
10491 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10495 for the letter body.
10499 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10502 to preserve the depth.
10503 Remember that you need to use
10506 arg "newline-insert newline"
10509 to create multiple lines inside the
10516 \begin_inset space ~
10526 \begin_layout Right Address
10528 \begin_inset Newline newline
10531 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10532 \begin_inset Newline newline
10538 \begin_layout Address
10540 \begin_inset space ~
10546 \begin_layout Quotation
10547 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10548 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10551 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10552 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10553 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10554 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10555 as soon as possible.
10556 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10559 \begin_layout Quotation
10560 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10561 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10562 with your order, along with payment.
10565 \begin_layout Quotation
10566 We thank you again for your patience.
10569 \begin_layout Address
10571 \begin_inset Newline newline
10578 \begin_layout Quotation
10579 That ends that example!
10582 \begin_layout Standard
10583 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10584 gives you a lot of power with just
10586 We could have easily nested an
10607 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10610 \begin_layout Subsection
10612 \begin_inset Index idx
10615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10616 Nesting ! Separation
10622 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10624 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10631 \begin_layout Standard
10632 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10634 For example you need two different enumerations:
10637 \begin_layout Enumerate
10642 \begin_layout Enumerate
10647 \begin_layout Enumerate
10651 \begin_layout Standard
10652 \begin_inset Separator plain
10658 \begin_layout Itemize
10664 \begin_layout Standard
10665 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10671 \begin_layout Enumerate
10675 \begin_layout Enumerate
10679 \begin_layout Enumerate
10683 \begin_layout Standard
10684 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10685 list item and use the menu
10687 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10688 Separated <Name> Above
10692 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10693 Separated <Name> Below
10696 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10697 ) and before or behind it the
10699 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10702 \begin_layout Standard
10703 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10704 (red arrow in LyX).
10705 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10706 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10709 \begin_layout Standard
10710 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10713 arg "paragraph-break"
10720 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10723 \begin_layout Section
10724 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10725 \begin_inset Index idx
10728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10737 \begin_layout Standard
10738 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10739 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10741 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10742 be broken at the end of a line.
10743 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10747 \begin_layout Subsection
10749 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10751 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10756 \begin_inset Index idx
10759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10768 \begin_layout Standard
10769 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10770 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10771 ) not to break the line at
10773 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10776 \begin_layout Quote
10777 Further documentation is given in section
10778 \begin_inset Newline newline
10782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10784 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10792 \begin_layout Standard
10793 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10808 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10817 A protected space is set with
10819 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10820 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10822 \begin_inset space ~
10830 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10836 \begin_layout Subsection
10838 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10840 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10845 \begin_inset Index idx
10848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10849 Spacing ! Horizontal
10857 \begin_layout Standard
10858 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10860 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10861 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10865 The length units are listed in Appendix
10866 \begin_inset space ~
10870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10872 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10879 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10883 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10888 \begin_inset Index idx
10891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10892 Spaces ! Inter-word
10900 \begin_layout Standard
10901 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10902 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10903 at the ends of sentences.
10904 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10905 automatically takes care about this.
10906 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10907 followed by a period; see section
10908 \begin_inset space ~
10912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10914 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10919 To insert a normal space, select
10921 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10922 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10924 \begin_inset space ~
10932 arg "space-insert normal"
10938 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10940 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10942 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10947 \begin_inset Index idx
10950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10959 \begin_layout Standard
10961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10968 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10977 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10978 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10979 inside abbreviations:
10982 \begin_layout Quote
10984 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10988 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10991 \begin_layout Standard
10992 or between values and units.
10993 Compare for example this:
10994 \begin_inset Newline newline
10998 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11002 \begin_inset Newline newline
11005 10 kg (normal space
11008 \begin_layout Standard
11009 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11011 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11012 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11014 \begin_inset space ~
11022 arg "space-insert thin"
11028 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11032 \begin_layout Standard
11033 You can also insert the following space types:
11036 \begin_layout Description
11038 \begin_inset space ~
11042 \begin_inset space ~
11045 space A line with a
11046 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11050 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11054 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11057 negative thin space between the arrows.
11060 \begin_layout Description
11062 \begin_inset space ~
11066 \begin_inset space ~
11069 space A line with a
11070 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11074 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11078 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11081 negative medium space between the arrows.
11084 \begin_layout Description
11086 \begin_inset space ~
11090 \begin_inset space ~
11093 space A line with a
11094 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11098 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11102 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11105 negative thick space between the arrows.
11108 \begin_layout Description
11110 \begin_inset space ~
11114 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11118 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11122 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11126 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11130 \begin_inset space ~
11134 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11137 em) space between the arrows.
11140 \begin_layout Description
11142 \begin_inset space ~
11146 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11150 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11154 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11158 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11162 \begin_inset space ~
11166 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11169 em) space between the arrows.
11172 \begin_layout Description
11174 \begin_inset space ~
11178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11182 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11186 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11190 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11194 \begin_inset space ~
11198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11201 em) space between the arrows.
11204 \begin_layout Description
11206 \begin_inset space ~
11210 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11214 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11219 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11223 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11226 cm space between the arrows.
11229 \begin_layout Standard
11231 \begin_inset space ~
11235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11237 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11241 lists the different space sizes.
11244 \begin_layout Standard
11245 \begin_inset Float table
11252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11253 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11256 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11258 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11262 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11272 \begin_inset Tabular
11273 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11274 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11275 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11276 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11316 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11364 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11388 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11392 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11420 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11444 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11459 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11472 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11487 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11500 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11528 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11549 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11551 \begin_inset Index idx
11554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11563 \begin_layout Standard
11564 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11565 feature for adding extra space
11566 in a uniform fashion.
11567 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11568 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11569 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11570 equally between themselves.
11573 \begin_layout Standard
11574 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11577 \begin_layout Quote
11579 This is on the left side
11580 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11583 This is on the right
11586 \begin_layout Quote
11589 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11593 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11599 \begin_layout Quote
11602 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11606 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11610 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11616 \begin_layout Standard
11617 That was an example in the
11623 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11627 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11631 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11634 is one in a standard paragraph.
11635 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11639 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11642 \begin_layout Standard
11643 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11646 \begin_inset space ~
11651 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11654 \begin_layout Standard
11656 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11660 \begin_inset space ~
11666 \begin_layout Standard
11668 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11672 \begin_inset space ~
11678 \begin_layout Standard
11680 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11684 \begin_inset space ~
11690 \begin_layout Standard
11692 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11696 \begin_inset space ~
11702 \begin_layout Standard
11704 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11708 \begin_inset space ~
11714 \begin_layout Standard
11716 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11720 \begin_inset space ~
11726 \begin_layout Standard
11727 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11735 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11739 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11741 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11742 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11746 option in the space dialog.
11754 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11756 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11758 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11763 \begin_inset Index idx
11766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11775 \begin_layout Standard
11776 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11777 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11780 \begin_layout Standard
11781 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11784 What is correct English?:
11785 \begin_inset Newline newline
11789 \begin_inset Newline newline
11793 \begin_inset space ~
11796 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11797 \begin_inset Newline newline
11801 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11812 \begin_inset Newline newline
11816 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11827 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11833 \begin_layout Standard
11835 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11840 \begin_inset space ~
11844 \begin_inset space ~
11848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11852 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11854 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11855 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11859 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11865 \begin_inset space ~
11869 \begin_inset space ~
11873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11876 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11885 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11886 That is why it is named
11887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11895 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11896 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11900 \begin_layout Subsection
11902 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11904 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11909 \begin_inset Index idx
11912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11921 \begin_layout Standard
11922 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11924 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11925 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11927 \begin_inset space ~
11933 There you find the following sizes:
11936 \begin_layout Standard
11949 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11950 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11955 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11957 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11958 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11960 \begin_inset space ~
11966 \begin_inset Index idx
11969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11970 Document ! Settings
11975 for the paragraph separation.
11976 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11987 \begin_layout Standard
11993 \begin_inset Index idx
11996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12002 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12003 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12008 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12009 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12018 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12027 s are described in section
12028 \begin_inset space ~
12032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12034 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12043 If there are several
12047 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12048 You can therefore use
12052 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12055 \begin_layout Standard
12060 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12061 \begin_inset space ~
12065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12067 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12074 \begin_layout Standard
12075 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12085 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12086 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12098 \begin_layout Subsection
12099 Paragraph Alignment
12100 \begin_inset Index idx
12103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12104 Paragraph ! Alignment
12112 \begin_layout Standard
12113 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12115 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12118 dialog (toolbar button
12121 arg "layout-paragraph"
12125 There are five possibilities:
12128 \begin_layout Itemize
12136 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12142 \begin_layout Itemize
12150 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12156 \begin_layout Itemize
12164 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12170 \begin_layout Itemize
12178 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12184 \begin_layout Itemize
12192 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12198 \begin_layout Standard
12199 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12200 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12201 the left and right margins.
12202 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12205 \begin_layout Standard
12207 This paragraph is right aligned,
12210 \begin_layout Standard
12212 this one is centered,
12215 \begin_layout Standard
12217 this one is left aligned.
12220 \begin_layout Subsection
12222 \begin_inset Index idx
12225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12226 Page breaks ! Forced
12232 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12234 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12241 \begin_layout Standard
12242 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12243 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12244 force a page break where you want one.
12245 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12246 is good at page breaking.
12247 Only if you use a lot of
12251 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12252 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12255 \begin_layout Standard
12256 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12257 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12261 have to change the page breaking.
12264 \begin_layout Standard
12265 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12267 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12269 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12270 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12272 \begin_inset space ~
12278 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12280 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12281 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12283 \begin_inset space ~
12288 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12290 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12291 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12294 \begin_layout Standard
12295 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12296 at the top of a page.
12297 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12299 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12300 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12301 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12305 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12309 to learn more about
12316 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12320 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12325 \begin_inset Index idx
12328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12329 Page breaks ! Clear
12337 \begin_layout Standard
12338 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12339 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12340 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12341 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12342 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12345 \begin_layout Standard
12346 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12348 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12349 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12351 \begin_inset space ~
12357 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12359 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12360 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12362 \begin_inset space ~
12366 \begin_inset space ~
12371 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12372 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12375 \begin_layout Subsection
12377 \begin_inset Index idx
12380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12387 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12389 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12396 \begin_layout Standard
12397 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12399 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12401 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12402 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12404 \begin_inset space ~
12408 \begin_inset space ~
12416 arg "newline-insert newline"
12420 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12422 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12423 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12425 \begin_inset space ~
12429 \begin_inset space ~
12437 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12440 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12442 This is useful to avoid
12443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12450 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12453 \begin_layout Standard
12454 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12455 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12457 very good at line breaking.
12458 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12459 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12460 \begin_inset space ~
12464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12466 reference "sec:Quote"
12471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12473 reference "sec:Verse"
12478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12480 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12487 \begin_layout Subsection
12489 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12491 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12496 \begin_inset Index idx
12499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12508 \begin_layout Standard
12510 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12521 \begin_layout Standard
12525 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12526 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12528 \begin_inset space ~
12533 you can insert horizontal lines.
12534 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12535 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12536 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12539 \begin_layout Standard
12541 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12552 \begin_layout Section
12553 Characters and Symbols
12556 \begin_layout Standard
12557 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12558 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12559 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12561 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12567 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12571 for information on how this is done.
12574 \begin_layout Standard
12575 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12580 dialog via the menu
12582 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12583 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12589 \begin_layout Standard
12590 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12598 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12599 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12601 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12609 \begin_layout Section
12610 Fonts and Text Styles
12611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12613 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12620 \begin_layout Subsection
12622 \begin_inset Index idx
12625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12634 \begin_layout Standard
12635 There are two types of fonts:
12638 \begin_layout Description
12640 \begin_inset space ~
12644 \begin_inset Index idx
12647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12653 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12654 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12658 characters) in the font.
12659 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12660 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12661 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12662 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12663 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12664 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12665 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12666 \begin_inset Newline newline
12669 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12670 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12671 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12672 sizes than at small ones.
12673 \begin_inset Newline newline
12687 \begin_inset space ~
12695 \begin_layout Description
12697 \begin_inset space ~
12701 \begin_inset Index idx
12704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12710 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12711 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12712 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12713 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12714 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12715 image manipulation program.
12716 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12717 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12718 \begin_inset space ~
12721 pixels high up to 34
12722 \begin_inset space ~
12725 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12726 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12727 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12729 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12730 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12731 \begin_inset Newline newline
12734 Bitmap fonts are named
12737 \begin_inset space ~
12742 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12745 \begin_layout Standard
12746 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12747 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12748 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12749 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12750 use scalable fonts.
12753 \begin_layout Standard
12754 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12757 \begin_layout Standard
12758 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12760 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
12762 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757415
12765 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12766 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12767 font to emphasize text, you use an
12768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12776 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12778 In \SpecialChar LyX
12779 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12783 \begin_layout Subsection
12786 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12788 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12795 \begin_layout Standard
12796 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12797 used its own fonts.
12798 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12799 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12802 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12803 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12804 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12805 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12806 to a word processor.
12807 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12808 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12809 files are very portable across
12810 different machines.
12811 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12812 has increased a lot
12813 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12816 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12818 \begin_inset space ~
12822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12824 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12829 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12830 code in the document
12831 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12834 \begin_layout Standard
12835 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12836 engines that are also able directly
12837 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12839 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12841 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12843 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12844 that is installed on your system.
12845 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12848 \begin_layout Standard
12849 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12857 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12858 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12866 \begin_layout Subsection
12867 Document Font and Font size
12868 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12870 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12875 \begin_inset Index idx
12878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12885 \begin_inset Index idx
12888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12897 \begin_layout Standard
12898 You can set the document fonts in the
12900 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12904 \begin_inset Index idx
12907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12908 Document ! Settings
12918 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12919 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12922 \begin_inset space ~
12931 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12933 \begin_inset space ~
12936 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12939 \begin_layout Standard
12944 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12945 This requires that you use
12957 as the output format, i.
12958 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12962 \begin_inset space \space{}
12965 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12966 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12967 installed (see section
12968 \begin_inset space ~
12972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12974 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12979 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12981 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12982 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12984 \begin_inset space ~
12987 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12988 cannot determine the family.
12989 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12990 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12993 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12996 \begin_layout Standard
12997 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12998 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
13003 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13009 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13011 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13013 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13016 font encoding, this is
13017 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13018 , depending on the document language,
13021 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13022 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13030 \begin_inset space ~
13036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13046 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13047 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13055 \begin_inset space ~
13061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13069 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13090 European Computer Modern
13093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13101 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13104 \begin_layout Standard
13109 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13110 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13115 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13118 \begin_inset space ~
13123 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13129 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13130 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13133 \begin_layout Itemize
13137 \begin_inset space ~
13142 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13155 \begin_inset space ~
13160 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13161 community in order to replace
13165 as the default font.
13166 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13167 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13170 \begin_inset space ~
13183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13184 One difference is improved kerning.
13192 \begin_layout Itemize
13193 If you do not like the look of
13201 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13202 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13206 \begin_inset space ~
13212 \begin_inset space ~
13222 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13223 \begin_inset space ~
13226 serif and typewriter fonts,
13230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13231 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13232 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13238 \begin_inset space ~
13247 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13248 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13252 \begin_inset space \space{}
13260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13264 \begin_inset space \space{}
13270 \begin_inset space ~
13278 \begin_inset space ~
13288 but you can also select your own.
13289 \begin_inset Newline newline
13292 The differences between roman,
13295 \begin_inset space ~
13304 fonts are explained in section
13305 \begin_inset space ~
13309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13311 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13316 \begin_inset Newline newline
13322 \begin_inset space ~
13327 was originally designed for newspapers.
13328 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13329 into the small newspaper columns.
13333 \begin_inset space ~
13338 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13341 \begin_layout Standard
13342 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13355 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13360 depends on the class you are using.
13361 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13364 \begin_layout Standard
13365 Note that the font size is the
13370 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13371 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13372 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13373 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13376 \begin_inset space ~
13382 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13383 \begin_inset space ~
13387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13389 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13396 \begin_layout Standard
13400 \begin_inset space ~
13405 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13407 \begin_inset space ~
13410 serif or typewriter.
13415 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13425 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13428 \begin_layout Standard
13433 LaTeX font encoding
13435 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13436 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13442 \begin_inset Index idx
13445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13453 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13455 \begin_inset space ~
13459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13461 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13468 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13469 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13470 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13474 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13482 \begin_layout Standard
13483 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13485 Use Old Style Figures
13489 Use True Small Caps
13492 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13495 Use Old Style Figures
13497 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13499 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13500 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13504 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13507 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13511 Use True Small Caps
13513 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13514 of scaled capitals.
13515 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13516 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13517 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
13521 \begin_layout Standard
13523 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
13524 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
13525 provided by the font package (or the
13529 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
13534 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
13540 \begin_layout Standard
13545 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13546 a font to display the script characters.
13550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13551 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13557 \begin_inset Index idx
13560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13567 So this has no effect for the document language
13583 \begin_layout Standard
13586 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13588 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13589 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13595 \begin_inset Index idx
13598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13600 packages ! microtype
13609 \begin_layout Standard
13612 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13614 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13619 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13620 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13626 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13627 \begin_inset space ~
13631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13633 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13643 \begin_layout Standard
13644 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13648 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13656 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13661 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13662 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13664 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13666 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13669 dialog, see section
13670 \begin_inset space ~
13674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13676 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13688 \begin_layout Subsection
13692 \begin_layout Standard
13693 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13694 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13696 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13697 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13698 choose a math font in the dialog
13700 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13704 \begin_inset Index idx
13707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13708 Document ! Settings
13714 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13715 automatically selects a math font.
13716 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13717 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13726 \begin_inset space ~
13732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13737 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13738 document font is available.
13741 \begin_layout Standard
13742 Note that the math font will not be used for
13746 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13752 or by the insertion of the command
13759 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13760 \begin_inset space ~
13764 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13765 while the math characters do not.
13767 \begin_inset space ~
13770 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13773 \begin_inset space ~
13781 \begin_inset space ~
13786 in the document font settings.
13789 \begin_layout Standard
13790 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13791 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13792 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13793 font (in most cases
13794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13800 \begin_inset space ~
13806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13809 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13810 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13818 \begin_inset space ~
13824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13830 \begin_layout Subsection
13832 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
13834 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
13838 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
13840 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13842 name "subsec:charstyles"
13849 \begin_inset Index idx
13852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13859 \begin_inset Index idx
13862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13871 \begin_layout Standard
13872 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13873 automatically changes the
13874 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
13877 style for certain paragraph environments.
13879 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
13880 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
13882 This is where we meet the concept of
13888 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
13890 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
13894 \begin_layout Standard
13896 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
13901 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
13903 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
13916 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
13922 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13925 e., available with all document classes.
13926 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
13930 for specific purposes.
13931 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
13934 \begin_layout Standard
13936 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
13937 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
13947 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
13951 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
13952 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13964 — you customized the
13969 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
13970 among them, encourage the use of
13982 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
13983 \begin_inset space ~
13987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13989 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13994 Rather than fiddling with
13998 , they encourage the use of
14002 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
14003 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14007 \begin_inset Quotes els
14011 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14014 ), not their form (
14015 \begin_inset Quotes els
14019 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14023 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14024 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14025 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14026 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14027 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14028 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14034 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14035 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14038 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14039 With a semantic markup (such as
14043 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14048 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14050 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14051 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14054 \begin_layout Standard
14056 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14057 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14058 by \SpecialChar LyX
14064 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14066 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14067 Builtin Text Styles
14068 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14070 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14077 \begin_layout Standard
14079 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14080 The two builtin text styles can be
14081 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14085 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14089 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14090 both of these styles
14093 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14101 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14107 \begin_layout Standard
14112 style, do one of the following:
14115 \begin_layout Itemize
14116 click on the toolbar button
14125 \begin_layout Itemize
14126 use the key binding
14133 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14137 \begin_layout Itemize
14139 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14147 arg "dialog-show character"
14153 arg "dialog-show character"
14156 ) as described in section
14157 \begin_inset space ~
14161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14163 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14172 \begin_layout Standard
14173 These commands are all toggles.
14178 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14181 \begin_layout Standard
14182 One typically uses the
14186 style for proper names.
14188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14195 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14201 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14205 \begin_layout Standard
14207 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14212 is producing text in
14216 , but the definition can be changed.
14221 \begin_layout Standard
14223 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14225 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14233 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14240 \begin_layout Itemize
14241 clicking on the toolbar button
14250 \begin_layout Itemize
14251 using the keybindings
14258 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14262 \begin_layout Itemize
14264 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14272 arg "dialog-show character"
14278 arg "dialog-show character"
14281 ) as described in section
14282 \begin_inset space ~
14286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14288 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14297 \begin_layout Standard
14302 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14304 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14306 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14309 packages use a different font
14310 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14311 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14317 \begin_layout Standard
14318 We've been using the
14322 style all over the place in this document.
14323 Here's one more example:
14326 \begin_layout Quotation
14330 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14332 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14338 \begin_layout Standard
14339 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14340 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14341 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14342 the common tendency to overuse
14343 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14345 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14350 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14354 \begin_layout Standard
14356 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14357 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14358 only as font changes and integrated in the
14366 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14369 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14376 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14378 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14382 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14385 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14387 \begin_inset space ~
14390 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14392 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14398 arg "dialog-show character"
14404 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14406 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14412 arg "dialog-show character"
14416 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14420 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14422 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14426 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14433 \begin_layout Standard
14435 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14436 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14438 \begin_inset space ~
14442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14444 reference "subsec:Modules"
14451 ), or local layout settings (see section
14452 \begin_inset space ~
14456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14458 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14463 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14467 markup for specific functions.
14468 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14473 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14483 \begin_inset Quotes els
14487 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14493 \begin_layout Standard
14495 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14496 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14498 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14504 \begin_layout Standard
14506 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14507 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14512 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14513 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14514 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14519 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14520 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14525 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14533 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14534 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14535 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14536 \begin_inset Flex Code
14539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14541 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14550 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14555 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14564 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14569 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14578 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14579 on screen their formal appearance.
14584 \begin_layout Subsection
14586 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
14588 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
14592 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
14598 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
14600 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
14606 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
14608 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
14612 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14614 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14619 \begin_inset Index idx
14622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14631 \begin_layout Standard
14632 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
14633 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
14636 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
14638 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
14640 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
14644 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
14645 the properties of text passages
14646 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
14650 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14651 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14652 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14653 from ordinary dialog.
14654 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
14658 \begin_layout Standard
14660 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
14661 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
14662 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
14663 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
14664 the properties of the respective text passages.
14669 comes in as a last resort.
14674 \begin_layout Standard
14675 Before we document how to
14676 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
14677 use custom character style
14678 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
14679 tweak the text properties
14681 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
14682 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
14684 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
14688 \begin_inset Newline newline
14691 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14692 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14695 \begin_layout Standard
14697 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
14698 use custom character styles
14699 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
14700 tweak text properties
14703 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
14706 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14708 \begin_inset space ~
14711 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14713 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
14719 arg "dialog-show character"
14724 dialog or press the toolbar button
14727 arg "dialog-show character"
14732 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
14735 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14736 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
14738 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
14741 property that you can choose.
14742 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14745 \begin_inset space ~
14750 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14752 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
14756 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
14758 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
14763 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14764 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14765 environments all at once.
14768 \begin_layout Standard
14770 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
14772 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
14775 properties, and their options (in addition to
14778 \begin_inset space ~
14784 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
14788 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
14796 \begin_layout Labeling
14797 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14811 The possible options are:
14815 \begin_layout Labeling
14816 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14821 This is the Roman font family.
14822 Normally a serif font.
14823 It's also the default family.
14833 \begin_layout Labeling
14834 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14838 \begin_inset space ~
14845 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14857 \begin_layout Labeling
14858 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14865 This is the Typewriter font family.
14871 arg "font-typewriter"
14877 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
14881 \begin_layout Standard
14883 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
14884 The general differences of these families are:
14887 \begin_layout Itemize
14889 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
14894 fonts use characters with serifs.
14895 These are the small
14896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14903 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14904 The following example shows the difference:
14905 \begin_inset Newline newline
14909 \begin_inset Newline newline
14914 text without serifs
14917 \begin_inset Newline newline
14920 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14921 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14928 \begin_layout Itemize
14930 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14935 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14936 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14937 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14940 \begin_layout Itemize
14942 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14955 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14973 \begin_inset Newline newline
14977 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14982 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14993 \begin_inset Note Note
14996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14998 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14999 For more on phantoms see section
15000 \begin_inset space ~
15004 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15006 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15016 \begin_inset Newline newline
15025 \begin_layout Labeling
15026 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15031 This corresponds to the print weight.
15036 \begin_layout Labeling
15037 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15042 This is the Medium font series.
15043 It's also the default series.
15046 \begin_layout Labeling
15047 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15054 This is the Bold font series.
15067 \begin_layout Labeling
15068 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15073 As the name implies.
15078 \begin_layout Labeling
15079 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15084 This is the Upright font shape.
15085 It's also the default shape.
15088 \begin_layout Labeling
15089 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15099 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15104 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15109 s the Italic font shape
15115 \begin_layout Labeling
15116 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15123 This is the Slanted font shape
15125 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15126 , this is different from italic).
15129 \begin_layout Labeling
15130 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15134 \begin_inset space ~
15141 This is the Small caps font shape
15148 \begin_layout Labeling
15149 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15154 Alters the text color.
15155 Note that not all DVI
15156 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15158 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15161 viewers are able to display colors.
15163 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15167 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15169 \begin_inset space ~
15176 , which means that the document default color set in
15178 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15179 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15185 \begin_inset space ~
15191 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15193 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15197 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15277 \begin_inset Index idx
15280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15289 \begin_layout Labeling
15290 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15295 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15296 the language of the document.
15297 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15298 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15299 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15302 in blue to indicate the change
15303 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15304 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15308 \begin_inset Newline newline
15311 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15313 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15314 When using the spell checking (see section
15315 \begin_inset space ~
15319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15321 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15325 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15326 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15328 \begin_inset Newline newline
15331 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15333 Exclude from Spellchecking
15336 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15339 \begin_layout Labeling
15340 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15345 Alters the size of the font.
15347 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15349 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15353 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15356 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15357 document font size.
15358 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15359 the details, but a general description of what
15365 \begin_layout Labeling
15366 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15387 arg "font-size tiny"
15393 \begin_layout Labeling
15394 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15415 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15421 \begin_layout Labeling
15422 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15443 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15449 \begin_layout Labeling
15450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15471 arg "font-size small"
15477 \begin_layout Labeling
15478 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15492 It's also the default size.
15496 arg "font-size normal"
15502 \begin_layout Labeling
15503 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15524 arg "font-size large"
15530 \begin_layout Labeling
15531 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15552 arg "font-size larger"
15558 \begin_layout Labeling
15559 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15580 arg "font-size largest"
15586 \begin_layout Labeling
15587 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15608 arg "font-size huge"
15614 \begin_layout Labeling
15615 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15636 arg "font-size giant"
15642 \begin_layout Labeling
15643 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15648 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15668 arg "font-size increase"
15674 \begin_layout Labeling
15675 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15680 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15700 arg "font-size decrease"
15707 \begin_layout Standard
15712 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15713 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15715 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15716 — use those instead.
15717 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15720 \begin_layout Labeling
15721 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15723 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
15727 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
15733 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
15734 change a few other things at the character level
15735 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
15736 have text passages being underlined
15740 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
15741 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
15742 days, when you could not change fonts.
15743 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15744 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15745 because some people
15749 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15756 \begin_layout Labeling
15757 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15759 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
15766 This is text with emphasize on
15769 This might seem like the same as
15773 , but it is actually a bit different.
15779 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
15781 Normally this font is equal to italic.
15782 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
15786 \begin_layout Labeling
15787 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15789 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
15794 Don't use underlining.
15799 \begin_layout Labeling
15800 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15802 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
15806 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
15814 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
15816 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
15825 arg "font-underline"
15831 \begin_inset Newline newline
15835 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
15838 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
15839 when you could not change fonts.
15840 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15841 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15842 because some people
15846 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15851 \begin_layout Labeling
15852 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15856 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
15858 \begin_inset space ~
15867 This is text with Double under
15868 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
15870 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
15879 arg "font-underunderline"
15883 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
15885 \begin_inset Newline newline
15888 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
15889 about double underbar
15894 \begin_layout Labeling
15895 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15899 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
15901 \begin_inset space ~
15910 This is text with Wavy under
15911 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
15913 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
15922 arg "font-underwave"
15926 \begin_inset Newline newline
15929 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
15930 Keep antinausea pills handy.
15931 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
15936 \begin_layout Labeling
15937 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15939 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
15944 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
15950 \begin_layout Labeling
15951 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15953 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
15958 Don't use strikethrough.
15961 \begin_layout Labeling
15962 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15966 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
15968 \begin_inset space ~
15972 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
15980 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
15982 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
15983 Single strikethrough
15991 arg "font-strikeout"
15995 \begin_inset Newline newline
15998 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
15999 changed in the meantime.
16002 \begin_layout Labeling
16003 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16005 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16009 \begin_inset space ~
16013 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16015 \begin_inset space ~
16019 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16027 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16029 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16035 \begin_inset Newline newline
16038 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16042 \begin_layout Standard
16044 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
16045 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
16046 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
16047 \begin_inset space ~
16051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16053 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16060 \begin_layout Itemize
16062 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
16069 This is text with emphasize on
16074 \begin_layout Itemize
16078 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16085 This is text with Noun on.
16087 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16094 , this is a logical attribute.
16095 Normally it's equivalent to
16098 \begin_inset space ~
16108 \begin_layout Standard
16109 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16110 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16112 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16117 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16118 chosen a new character style
16119 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16120 applied a text property
16123 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16126 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16128 \begin_inset space ~
16131 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16133 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16139 arg "dialog-show character"
16147 arg "dialog-show character"
16150 ) dialog, the settings are
16151 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16155 You can activate the
16156 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16158 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16159 last applied properties
16161 by using the toolbar button
16164 arg "textstyle-apply"
16168 The button lets you apply
16169 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16170 your custom character style
16171 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16174 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16176 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16177 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16178 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16179 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16184 \begin_layout Standard
16185 To completely reset the
16186 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16188 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16189 text properties of a selection
16191 to the default, use
16192 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16194 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16204 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16209 from the menu of the toolbar button
16212 arg "textstyle-apply"
16219 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16220 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16221 you just set the shape to
16222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16240 \begin_inset space ~
16254 \begin_layout Standard
16256 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16257 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16265 \begin_inset space ~
16277 \begin_layout Itemize
16279 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16292 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16310 \begin_inset Newline newline
16314 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16328 \begin_inset Note Note
16331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16332 For more on phantoms see section
16333 \begin_inset space ~
16337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16339 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16349 \begin_inset Newline newline
16355 \begin_layout Itemize
16357 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16362 fonts use characters with serifs.
16363 These are the small
16364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16371 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16372 The following example shows the difference:
16373 \begin_inset Newline newline
16377 \begin_inset Newline newline
16382 text without serifs
16385 \begin_inset Newline newline
16388 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16389 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16396 \begin_layout Itemize
16398 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16403 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16404 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16405 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16410 \begin_layout Standard
16412 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16420 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16421 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16424 \begin_inset space ~
16429 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16430 the property to be removed.
16431 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16432 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16433 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16451 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16452 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16460 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16464 \begin_inset space ~
16469 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16480 If you, for example, set
16481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16499 \begin_inset space ~
16504 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16513 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16518 \begin_layout Standard
16520 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16523 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16524 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16527 \begin_layout Section
16528 Printing and Previewing
16531 \begin_layout Subsection
16535 \begin_layout Standard
16536 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16537 using \SpecialChar LyX
16538 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16539 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16540 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16541 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16543 Additional Features
16548 \begin_layout Standard
16550 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16553 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16554 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16555 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16558 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16559 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16560 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16561 to turn your writing into printable output.
16562 This happens in two stages:
16565 \begin_layout Enumerate
16566 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16567 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16569 a file with the extension,
16570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16584 \begin_layout Enumerate
16585 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
16586 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16587 to use the commands in the
16591 file to produce printable output.
16594 \begin_layout Subsection
16595 Output file formats
16596 \begin_inset Index idx
16599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16608 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
16615 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16616 Simple text (ASCII)
16617 \begin_inset Index idx
16620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16621 File formats ! ASCII
16629 \begin_layout Standard
16630 This file type has the extension
16631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16643 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
16644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16647 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
16648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16654 \begin_layout Standard
16655 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
16657 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16658 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16660 \begin_inset space ~
16666 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
16667 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
16668 bibliography (section
16669 \begin_inset space ~
16673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16675 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16680 If your document includes such material, use
16682 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16683 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16685 \begin_inset space ~
16689 \begin_inset space ~
16693 \begin_inset space ~
16701 \begin_inset space ~
16705 \begin_inset space ~
16711 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
16712 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16715 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16718 \begin_inset Index idx
16721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16722 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
16731 \begin_layout Standard
16732 This file type has the extension
16733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16744 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16747 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16748 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16749 -Errors or to process it manually
16750 with console commands.
16751 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16752 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16753 's temporary directory whenever you
16754 view or export your document.
16757 \begin_layout Standard
16758 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
16759 -file using the menu
16761 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16762 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16766 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
16767 export variants are explained in section
16768 \begin_inset space ~
16772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16774 reference "subsec:Export"
16781 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16783 \begin_inset Index idx
16786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16795 \begin_layout Standard
16796 This file type has the extension
16797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16817 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
16818 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
16819 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
16823 \begin_layout Standard
16824 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
16825 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
16826 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
16827 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
16828 when you view the DVI.
16829 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
16832 \begin_layout Standard
16833 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
16835 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16836 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16841 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16842 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16844 \begin_inset space ~
16850 The latter option uses the program
16852 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16858 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16861 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16862 font access (see section
16863 \begin_inset space ~
16867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16869 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16874 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16875 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16880 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16882 \begin_inset Index idx
16885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16886 File formats ! PostScript
16894 \begin_layout Standard
16895 This file type has the extension
16896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16908 PostScript was developed by the company
16912 as a printer language.
16913 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
16915 PostScript can be seen as a
16916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16919 programming language
16920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16923 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
16927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16928 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16935 \begin_inset Index idx
16938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16940 packages ! pstricks
16950 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
16953 \begin_layout Standard
16954 PostScript can only contain images in the format
16955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16958 Encapsulated PostScript
16959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16962 (EPS, file extension
16963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16975 As \SpecialChar LyX
16976 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
16977 convert them in the background to EPS.
16978 If, for example, you have 50
16979 \begin_inset space ~
16982 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
16984 \begin_inset space ~
16987 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
16988 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
16990 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
16991 EPS to avoid this problem.
16994 \begin_layout Standard
16995 You can export to PostScript using the menu
16997 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16998 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17004 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17006 \begin_inset Index idx
17009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17016 \begin_inset Index idx
17019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17028 \begin_layout Standard
17029 This file type has the extension
17030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17046 Portable Document Format
17047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17054 was derived from PostScript.
17055 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17057 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17064 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
17065 looks exactly the same.
17068 \begin_layout Standard
17069 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17073 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17077 (JPG, file extension
17078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17105 Portable Network Graphics
17106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17109 (PNG, file extension
17110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17122 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17123 converts them in the
17124 background to one of these formats.
17125 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17126 will slow down your workflow.
17127 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17130 \begin_layout Standard
17131 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17133 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17139 \begin_layout Description
17141 \begin_inset space ~
17144 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17148 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17151 \begin_layout Description
17153 \begin_inset space ~
17160 ) This uses the program
17162 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17165 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17168 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17171 is a new engine, derived from
17175 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17176 access (see section
17177 \begin_inset space ~
17181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17183 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17188 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17189 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17194 \begin_layout Description
17196 \begin_inset space ~
17203 ) This uses the program
17208 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17214 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17215 font access (see section
17216 \begin_inset space ~
17220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17222 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17227 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17228 vertically written Japanese.
17231 \begin_layout Description
17233 \begin_inset space ~
17236 (cropped) This is the same as
17239 \begin_inset space ~
17244 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17245 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17246 to generate good-looking
17247 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17250 \begin_layout Description
17252 \begin_inset space ~
17255 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17259 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17263 \begin_layout Description
17265 \begin_inset space ~
17268 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17272 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17273 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17277 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17278 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17281 \begin_layout Standard
17285 \begin_inset space ~
17294 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17295 works without problems.
17296 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17297 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17301 \begin_inset space ~
17309 \begin_inset space ~
17314 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17322 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17324 \begin_inset Index idx
17327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17328 FileFormats ! XHTML
17334 \begin_inset Index idx
17337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17346 \begin_layout Standard
17347 This file type has the extension
17348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17360 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17361 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17362 When \SpecialChar LyX
17363 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17364 suitable for the purpose.
17365 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17367 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17368 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17371 between different formats, which are described in section
17373 Math Output in XHTML
17378 \begin_inset space ~
17386 \begin_layout Standard
17387 XHTML output remains
17388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17395 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17396 features are supported yet.
17400 and the World Wide Web
17404 Additional Features
17406 manual, for more information.
17409 \begin_layout Standard
17410 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17412 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17413 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17419 \begin_layout Subsection
17421 \begin_inset Index idx
17424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17433 \begin_layout Standard
17434 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17435 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17444 or use the toolbar button
17451 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17452 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17453 \begin_inset space ~
17457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17459 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17463 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17465 \begin_inset space ~
17469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17471 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17476 Further output formats can be selected via
17478 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17479 View (Other Formats)
17481 or the toolbar button
17490 \begin_layout Standard
17491 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17492 viewer window using the menu
17494 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17499 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17500 Update (Other Formats)
17505 \begin_layout Standard
17506 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17509 To have a real output, export your document.
17512 \begin_layout Section
17513 A few Words about Typography
17514 \begin_inset Index idx
17517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17526 \begin_layout Subsection
17527 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17528 \begin_inset Index idx
17531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17538 \begin_inset Index idx
17541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17550 \begin_layout Standard
17551 In \SpecialChar LyX
17553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17564 symbol comes in four variants: the
17581 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17587 \begin_layout Standard
17588 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17598 height_special "totalheight"
17603 backgroundcolor "none"
17606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17607 \begin_inset Tabular
17608 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17609 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17610 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17611 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17612 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17613 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17614 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17642 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17643 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17682 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17683 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17705 system key combination
17709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17710 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
17713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17722 and the em dash with
17725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17738 is the Mac label for the right
17749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17762 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17763 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17785 system key combination or
17786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17800 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17813 \begin_inset Formula $-$
17821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17852 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17858 \begin_layout Standard
17859 Dashes can also be inserted with
17861 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17863 \begin_inset space ~
17866 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
17874 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
17875 and 2014 for the en dash).
17878 \begin_layout Standard
17879 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
17880 mode and has a length of its own.
17881 Here are some examples:
17884 \begin_layout Enumerate
17885 line- and page-breaks
17886 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17896 \begin_layout Enumerate
17898 \begin_inset space ~
17902 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17912 \begin_layout Enumerate
17913 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
17914 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17924 \begin_layout Enumerate
17925 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
17929 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17939 \begin_layout Standard
17941 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17943 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
17944 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
17952 \begin_layout Subsection
17953 Dashes and Line Breaks
17954 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17956 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
17963 \begin_layout Standard
17964 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
17965 case and locale, e.
17966 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17972 \begin_layout Itemize
17973 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
17974 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
17977 \begin_layout Itemize
17978 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
17982 \begin_layout Itemize
17983 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
17984 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
17987 \begin_layout Standard
17988 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
17989 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18000 allows line breaks after hyphens
18001 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
18003 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
18006 en-dashes and em-dashes.
18009 \begin_layout Enumerate
18010 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
18011 \begin_inset space ~
18014 – common in British English and generally recommended by
18016 The Elements of Typographic Style
18019 \begin_inset space ~
18022 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
18025 \begin_layout Enumerate
18026 Unwanted line breaks
18031 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
18033 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
18036 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18043 Prevent Hyphenation
18048 \begin_inset space ~
18064 in \SpecialChar TeX
18066 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
18067 , a protected space does not suffice
18071 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
18076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18078 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
18079 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18080 in the document language.
18081 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18095 \begin_layout Itemize
18097 \begin_inset space ~
18101 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18111 height_special "totalheight"
18116 backgroundcolor "none"
18119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18128 \begin_layout Itemize
18130 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18140 height_special "totalheight"
18145 backgroundcolor "none"
18148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18150 \begin_inset space ~
18158 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18159 \begin_inset space ~
18162 – sont très utiles.
18165 \begin_layout Itemize
18170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18179 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18183 \begin_layout Standard
18184 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18185 \begin_inset space ~
18188 – in contrast to an overfull line
18189 \begin_inset space ~
18192 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18196 \begin_layout Standard
18197 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18200 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18201 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18202 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18203 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18208 \begin_layout Enumerate
18209 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18210 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18211 or \SpecialChar TeX
18217 \begin_layout Itemize
18219 \begin_inset space ~
18222 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18223 \begin_inset space ~
18226 – sont très utiles.
18230 \begin_layout Enumerate
18231 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18232 \begin_inset Newline newline
18237 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18238 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18240 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
18242 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
18244 \begin_inset space ~
18250 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
18252 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
18254 \begin_inset space ~
18265 \begin_layout Itemize
18266 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18267 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18268 should be followed by
18269 a line break opportunity.
18272 \begin_layout Standard
18273 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18274 \begin_inset space ~
18278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18280 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18291 \begin_layout Enumerate
18292 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18293 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18294 or en dashes (see section
18295 \begin_inset space ~
18299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18301 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18311 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18312 Changes and backwards compatibility
18315 \begin_layout Standard
18316 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18318 \begin_inset space ~
18321 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18322 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18331 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18332 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18340 \begin_layout Standard
18341 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18343 \begin_inset space ~
18346 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18348 prevents ligation to dashes.
18350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18357 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18362 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18363 after the input (unless the current text font is
18371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18372 The behavior was changed since
18373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18388 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18389 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18390 as non-breakable dashes.
18391 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18400 \begin_layout Standard
18403 \begin_inset space ~
18411 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18413 \begin_inset space ~
18416 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18419 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18420 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18421 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18422 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18424 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18428 If you used both literal and
18429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18436 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18438 \begin_inset space ~
18441 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18442 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18445 \begin_layout Subsection
18447 \begin_inset Index idx
18450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18459 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18466 \begin_layout Standard
18467 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18468 but automatically in the output.
18469 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18475 \begin_inset Index idx
18478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18485 following the rules of the document language.
18487 does not hyphenate text in the
18491 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18494 \begin_layout Standard
18496 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18500 font and with unusual constructs, like
18501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18509 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18510 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18511 This is done with the menu
18513 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18514 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18516 \begin_inset space ~
18522 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18524 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18528 \begin_layout Standard
18529 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18530 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18541 would then see the hyphen
18542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18549 as a line break possibility.
18550 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18551 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18554 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18555 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18558 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18560 Prevent Hyphenation
18565 \begin_inset space ~
18573 \begin_layout Subsection
18575 \begin_inset Index idx
18578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18587 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18588 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
18589 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18591 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
18598 \begin_layout Standard
18599 When \SpecialChar LyX
18600 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18601 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18603 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
18606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18609 appropriate amount of space.
18610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18613 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
18615 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
18616 gets after another word.
18619 \begin_layout Standard
18620 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
18621 not work in all cases.
18623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18634 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
18635 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
18638 \begin_layout Standard
18639 Here are some examples of
18643 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18646 \begin_layout Itemize
18651 \begin_layout Itemize
18656 \begin_layout Standard
18657 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18660 \begin_layout Itemize
18662 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18666 this is too much space!
18669 \begin_layout Itemize
18674 \begin_layout Standard
18675 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18678 \begin_layout Standard
18679 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
18682 \begin_layout Enumerate
18686 \begin_inset space ~
18691 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
18692 \begin_inset space ~
18696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18698 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
18703 \begin_inset Index idx
18706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18707 Spaces ! inter-word
18715 \begin_layout Enumerate
18719 \begin_inset space ~
18724 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
18725 \begin_inset space ~
18729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18731 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
18736 \begin_inset Index idx
18739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18748 \begin_layout Enumerate
18752 \begin_inset space ~
18756 \begin_inset space ~
18760 \begin_inset space ~
18767 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18769 \begin_inset space ~
18774 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
18775 This function is also bound to
18778 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
18784 \begin_layout Standard
18785 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
18788 \begin_layout Itemize
18790 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18794 \begin_inset space \space{}
18797 this is too much space!
18800 \begin_layout Itemize
18801 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
18805 \begin_layout Standard
18806 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
18807 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
18809 will take care of this.
18812 \begin_layout Standard
18813 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
18817 \begin_inset space ~
18823 feature described in the section
18825 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
18830 Additional Features
18835 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18837 \begin_inset Index idx
18840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18841 Typography ! Quotation marks
18847 \begin_inset Index idx
18850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18851 Quotation marks | see
18855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18881 \begin_layout Standard
18883 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
18884 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
18885 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
18887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18895 The keyboard character,
18899 , generates this automatically.
18902 \begin_layout Standard
18903 You can specify what character the
18907 key produces by using the submenu
18913 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18917 \begin_inset Index idx
18920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18921 Document ! Settings
18926 dialog and switching the
18930 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
18931 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
18933 \begin_inset space ~
18939 \begin_layout Labeling
18940 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18952 \begin_inset space ~
18956 \begin_inset space ~
18960 \begin_inset Quotes els
18964 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18978 \begin_inset Quotes els
18982 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18985 quotation marks (as common, e.
18986 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18992 \begin_layout Labeling
18993 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18996 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19000 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19004 \begin_inset space ~
19008 \begin_inset space ~
19012 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19016 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19022 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19026 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19030 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19034 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19037 quotation marks (as common, e.
19038 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19044 \begin_layout Labeling
19045 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19048 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19052 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19056 \begin_inset space ~
19060 \begin_inset space ~
19064 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19068 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19074 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19078 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19082 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19086 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19089 quotation marks (as common, e.
19090 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19096 \begin_layout Labeling
19097 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19100 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19104 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19108 \begin_inset space ~
19112 \begin_inset space ~
19116 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19120 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19126 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19130 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19134 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19138 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19141 quotation marks (as common, e.
19142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19148 \begin_layout Labeling
19149 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19152 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19156 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19160 \begin_inset space ~
19164 \begin_inset space ~
19168 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19172 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19178 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19182 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19186 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19190 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19193 quotation marks (as common, e.
19194 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19197 g., in Switzerland)
19200 \begin_layout Labeling
19201 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19204 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19208 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19212 \begin_inset space ~
19216 \begin_inset space ~
19220 \begin_inset Quotes als
19224 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19230 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19234 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19238 \begin_inset Quotes als
19242 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19245 quotation marks (as common, e.
19246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19252 \begin_layout Labeling
19253 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19256 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19260 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19264 \begin_inset space ~
19268 \begin_inset space ~
19272 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19276 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19282 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19286 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19290 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19294 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19297 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19300 \begin_layout Labeling
19301 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19304 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19308 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19312 \begin_inset space ~
19316 \begin_inset space ~
19320 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19324 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19330 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19334 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19338 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19342 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19345 quotation marks (as common, e.
19346 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19349 g., in Great Britain)
19352 \begin_layout Labeling
19353 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19356 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19360 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19364 \begin_inset space ~
19368 \begin_inset space ~
19372 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19376 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19382 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19386 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19390 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19394 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19397 quotation marks (as common, e.
19398 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19404 \begin_layout Labeling
19405 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19408 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19412 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19416 \begin_inset space ~
19420 \begin_inset space ~
19424 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19428 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19434 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19438 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19442 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19446 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19449 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19454 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19455 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19456 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19457 the inner marks differ).
19465 \begin_layout Labeling
19466 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19469 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19473 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19477 \begin_inset space ~
19481 \begin_inset space ~
19485 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19489 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19495 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19499 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19503 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19507 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19510 quotation marks (as common, e.
19511 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19517 \begin_layout Labeling
19518 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19521 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19525 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19529 \begin_inset space ~
19533 \begin_inset space ~
19537 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19541 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19547 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19551 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19555 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19559 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19562 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19565 \begin_layout Labeling
19566 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19567 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19575 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19581 \begin_inset space ~
19585 \begin_inset space ~
19591 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19599 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19603 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19607 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19611 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19615 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19618 quotation marks (as common, e.
19619 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19627 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19628 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19636 \begin_layout Labeling
19637 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19638 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19646 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19652 \begin_inset space ~
19656 \begin_inset space ~
19662 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19670 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19674 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19678 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19682 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19686 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19689 quotation marks (as common, e.
19690 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19693 g., in North Korea and China)
19697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19698 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19699 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19707 \begin_layout Standard
19708 Inner quotation marks
19712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19713 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
19714 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
19715 case (and specifically the British style shows that
19716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19723 does not necessarily mean
19724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19732 This is why we call them
19733 \begin_inset Quotes els
19737 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19753 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
19755 \begin_inset Quotes els
19759 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19762 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
19765 arg "quote-insert inner"
19770 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19776 \begin_layout Standard
19777 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
19778 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
19779 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
19780 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
19781 If you check the setting
19783 Use dynamic quotation marks
19787 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19788 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19791 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
19792 they appear in a special color).
19793 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
19794 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
19796 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19799 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
19802 \begin_layout Standard
19803 Individual quotation marks (i.
19804 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19807 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
19808 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
19812 \begin_layout Subsection
19814 \begin_inset Index idx
19817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19818 Typography ! Ligatures
19824 \begin_inset Index idx
19827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19856 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19858 name "subsec:Ligatures"
19865 \begin_layout Standard
19866 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
19867 print them as single characters.
19868 These groups are known as
19873 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
19874 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
19876 Here are the standard ligatures:
19879 \begin_layout Itemize
19883 \begin_layout Itemize
19887 \begin_layout Itemize
19891 \begin_layout Itemize
19895 \begin_layout Itemize
19899 \begin_layout Standard
19900 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
19903 \begin_layout Standard
19904 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
19905 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
19906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19913 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
19914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19929 To break a ligature, use
19931 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19932 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19934 \begin_inset space ~
19941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19952 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19969 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19977 \begin_layout Subsection
19979 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
19981 \begin_inset Index idx
19984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19994 \begin_layout Standard
19997 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19998 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
20002 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
20005 \begin_layout Description
20007 The name of the game.
20010 \begin_layout Description
20012 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
20016 \begin_layout Description
20018 The \SpecialChar TeX
20019 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
20023 \begin_layout Description
20024 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
20025 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20029 \begin_layout Standard
20030 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20036 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
20040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20044 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
20045 world to give programs geek version numbers.
20046 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
20047 converges to the number
20048 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20051 : The actual version is
20052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20060 , the previous one was
20061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20072 \begin_layout Subsection
20074 \begin_inset Index idx
20077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20086 \begin_layout Standard
20087 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
20088 space between two words.
20089 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
20092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20099 for units use the menu
20101 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20102 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20104 \begin_inset space ~
20112 arg "space-insert thin"
20118 \begin_layout Standard
20119 Here is an example to show the differences:
20122 \begin_layout Standard
20123 \begin_inset Tabular
20124 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20125 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20126 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20127 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20134 \begin_inset space ~
20138 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20150 space between number and unit
20157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20162 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20166 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20178 half space between number and unit
20191 \begin_layout Subsection
20193 \begin_inset Index idx
20196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20197 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20205 \begin_layout Standard
20206 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20208 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20209 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20210 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20211 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20212 These bits of text became known as
20223 \begin_layout Standard
20224 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20225 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20226 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20227 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20228 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20229 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20230 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20231 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20232 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20233 \begin_inset Newline newline
20241 \begin_inset Newline newline
20249 \begin_inset Newline newline
20252 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20253 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20254 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20256 \begin_inset space ~
20260 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20262 key "latexcompanion"
20268 \begin_inset space ~
20272 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20279 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20280 's page break mechanism.
20283 \begin_layout Chapter
20284 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20285 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20287 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20294 \begin_layout Standard
20295 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20298 \begin_inset space ~
20304 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20307 \begin_layout Section
20309 \begin_inset Index idx
20312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20319 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20328 \begin_layout Standard
20330 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20333 \begin_layout Description
20336 \begin_inset space ~
20339 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20340 \begin_inset Newline newline
20344 \begin_inset Note Note
20347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20348 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20356 \begin_layout Description
20357 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20358 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20359 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20362 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20363 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20365 \begin_inset space ~
20371 \begin_inset Newline newline
20375 \begin_inset Note Comment
20378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20379 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20388 \begin_layout Description
20390 \begin_inset space ~
20393 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20394 set in the document settings under
20396 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20398 \begin_inset space ~
20404 \begin_inset Newline newline
20408 \begin_inset Newline newline
20412 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20421 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20422 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20427 of a comment that appears in the output.
20433 \begin_inset Newline newline
20437 \begin_inset Newline newline
20440 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20443 \begin_layout Standard
20444 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20452 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20456 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20459 \begin_layout Section
20461 \begin_inset Index idx
20464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20471 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20473 name "sec:Footnotes"
20480 \begin_layout Standard
20482 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20485 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20488 or the toolbar button
20491 arg "footnote-insert"
20503 \begin_inset Graphics
20504 filename clipart/footnote.png
20513 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20514 's representation of your footnote.
20524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20543 label, the box will
20547 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20548 Clicking on the box label again will close
20561 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20562 and click on the footnote
20577 \begin_layout Standard
20578 Here is an example footnote:
20586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20587 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
20595 \begin_layout Standard
20596 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
20597 position where the footnote box is placed.
20598 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
20599 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20600 according to the document class.
20602 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
20603 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20609 ey are described in the
20612 \begin_inset space ~
20620 \begin_layout Section
20622 \begin_inset Index idx
20625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20632 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20634 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
20641 \begin_layout Standard
20642 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
20644 When you insert a margin note via the menu
20646 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20648 \begin_inset space ~
20653 or the toolbar button
20656 arg "marginalnote-insert"
20675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20682 appearing within your text.
20683 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20684 's representation of your margin
20693 \begin_layout Standard
20694 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
20698 \begin_inset Marginal
20701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20703 This is a marginal note.
20711 \begin_layout Standard
20712 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
20713 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
20714 pages, right on odd pages.
20717 \begin_layout Standard
20718 For further information about marginal notes see the section
20721 \begin_inset space ~
20729 \begin_inset space ~
20737 \begin_layout Section
20738 Graphics and Images
20739 \begin_inset Index idx
20742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20749 \begin_inset Index idx
20752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20759 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20761 name "sec:Graphics"
20768 \begin_layout Standard
20769 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
20770 you want and click on the toolbar icon
20773 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
20778 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20782 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
20785 \begin_layout Standard
20786 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
20791 tab allows you to choose your image file.
20792 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
20794 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
20795 \begin_inset space ~
20799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20801 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
20808 \begin_layout Standard
20813 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
20814 of the image in the output.
20815 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
20819 \begin_inset space ~
20823 \begin_inset space ~
20832 \begin_inset space ~
20836 \begin_inset space ~
20840 \begin_inset space ~
20845 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
20846 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
20854 \begin_layout Standard
20858 \begin_inset space ~
20862 \begin_inset space ~
20867 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
20868 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
20870 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
20875 \begin_inset space ~
20880 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
20881 with the image size is printed.
20884 \begin_layout Standard
20885 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
20886 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
20888 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
20891 \begin_layout Standard
20893 \begin_inset Graphics
20894 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
20902 \begin_layout Standard
20903 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
20904 the image into a float, see section
20905 \begin_inset space ~
20909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20911 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
20918 \begin_layout Subsection
20920 \begin_inset Index idx
20923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20930 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20932 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
20939 \begin_layout Standard
20940 You can insert images in any known file format.
20941 But as we explained in section
20942 \begin_inset space ~
20946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20948 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20952 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
20954 therefore uses the program
20958 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
20959 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
20960 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
20961 \begin_inset space ~
20965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20967 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20974 \begin_layout Standard
20975 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
20978 \begin_layout Description
20980 \begin_inset space ~
20983 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
20984 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
20985 Well-known bitmap image formats are
20986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20989 Graphics Interchange Format
20990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20993 (GIF, file extension
20994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21006 \begin_inset Index idx
21009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21041 Portable Network Graphics
21042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21045 (PNG, file extension
21046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21058 \begin_inset Index idx
21061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21093 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21097 (JPG, file extension
21098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21122 \begin_inset Index idx
21125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21156 \begin_layout Description
21158 \begin_inset space ~
21161 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21163 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21164 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21165 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21166 \begin_inset Newline newline
21169 Scalable image formats can be
21170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21173 Scalable Vector Graphics
21174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21177 (SVG, file extension
21178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21190 \begin_inset Index idx
21193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21225 Encapsulated PostScript
21226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21229 (EPS, file extension
21230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21242 \begin_inset Index idx
21245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21277 Portable Document Format
21278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21281 (PDF, file extension
21282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21294 \begin_inset Index idx
21297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21312 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21313 result will not be scalable.
21314 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21320 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21328 \begin_layout Standard
21329 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21336 \begin_layout Subsection
21337 Grouping of Image Settings
21338 \begin_inset Index idx
21341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21342 Images ! Settings grouping
21350 \begin_layout Standard
21351 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21353 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21354 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21356 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21357 need to manually change each of them.
21361 \begin_layout Standard
21362 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21365 \begin_inset space ~
21369 \begin_inset space ~
21381 \begin_inset space ~
21385 \begin_inset space ~
21391 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21392 and checking the name of the desired group.
21395 \begin_layout Section
21397 \begin_inset Index idx
21400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21407 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21416 \begin_layout Standard
21417 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21420 arg "tabular-insert"
21425 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21429 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
21430 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
21431 , and you can select a specific (border) style
21434 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21435 from the rest of the table.
21436 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21437 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21439 Here is an example table:
21442 \begin_layout Standard
21444 \begin_inset Tabular
21445 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21446 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21447 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21448 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21449 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21450 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21648 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
21652 \begin_layout Standard
21654 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
21655 This corresponds to the
21656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21663 table style listed in the style selection.
21666 \begin_layout Standard
21668 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
21669 Other available styles include:
21672 \begin_layout Itemize
21674 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
21676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21683 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
21687 \begin_layout Itemize
21689 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
21690 a border-less table with no lines at all,
21693 \begin_layout Itemize
21695 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
21697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21704 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
21705 bold top/bottom lines (see
21716 \begin_layout Standard
21718 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
21719 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
21720 button can be changed in
21722 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21723 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21727 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
21731 \begin_layout Subsection
21735 \begin_layout Standard
21736 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
21739 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
21743 This brings up the table dialog.
21744 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
21745 cursor is placed currently.
21746 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
21747 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
21748 done on all of your selection.
21751 \begin_layout Standard
21752 In addition to the table dialog, the
21755 \begin_inset space ~
21760 helps you in setting table properties.
21761 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
21764 \begin_layout Standard
21768 \begin_inset space ~
21773 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
21774 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
21775 current cell respectively.
21776 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
21778 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
21779 of text, see section
21780 \begin_inset space ~
21784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21786 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
21793 \begin_layout Standard
21794 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
21795 using the check box
21804 This will merge the cells to
21808 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
21809 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
21810 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
21811 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
21812 in the last row without the upper border:
21815 \begin_layout Standard
21817 \begin_inset Tabular
21818 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
21819 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
21820 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21821 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
21822 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21823 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21834 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21843 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21919 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21954 \begin_layout Standard
21955 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21956 -arguments for the table.
21957 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
21958 explained in the chapter
21965 \begin_inset space ~
21971 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
21972 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
21973 but are visible in the output.
21976 \begin_layout Standard
21977 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21985 Most DVI-viewers are
21989 able to display rotations.
21997 \begin_layout Standard
22002 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
22007 adds lines for all cell borders.
22010 \begin_layout Subsection
22012 \begin_inset Index idx
22015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22016 Tables ! Multi-page
22022 \begin_inset Index idx
22025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22034 \begin_layout Standard
22035 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
22038 \begin_inset space ~
22042 \begin_inset space ~
22050 \begin_inset space ~
22055 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22056 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22059 \begin_layout Description
22064 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22065 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22066 Except for the first page, if
22069 \begin_inset space ~
22077 \begin_layout Description
22081 \begin_inset space ~
22086 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22087 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22090 \begin_layout Description
22095 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22096 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22097 except for the last page, if
22100 \begin_inset space ~
22108 \begin_layout Description
22112 \begin_inset space ~
22117 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22118 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22121 \begin_layout Description
22122 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22123 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22125 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22129 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22132 \begin_inset space ~
22140 \begin_layout Standard
22141 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22142 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22143 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22149 In this context, first means first in this order:
22152 \begin_inset space ~
22164 \begin_inset space ~
22169 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22172 \begin_layout Standard
22174 \begin_inset Tabular
22175 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22176 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22177 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22178 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22179 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22180 <row endfirsthead="true">
22181 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22187 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22192 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22201 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22211 <row endfirsthead="true">
22212 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22223 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22232 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22244 <row endhead="true">
22245 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22256 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22265 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22275 <row endhead="true">
22276 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22287 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22296 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22308 <row endfoot="true">
22309 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22320 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22329 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22360 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23301 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23310 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23319 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23330 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23361 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23392 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23423 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23454 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23485 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23516 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23547 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23578 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23609 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23640 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23671 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23702 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23733 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23764 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23795 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23826 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23857 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23888 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23919 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23950 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23981 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24012 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24043 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24074 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24105 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24136 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24167 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24198 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24229 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24260 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24290 <row endlastfoot="true">
24291 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24302 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24311 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24328 \begin_layout Subsection
24330 \begin_inset Index idx
24333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24340 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24342 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24349 \begin_layout Standard
24350 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24351 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24352 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24353 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24357 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24360 \begin_layout Standard
24361 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24362 for the column in the table dialog.
24363 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24364 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24368 \begin_layout Standard
24370 \begin_inset Tabular
24371 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24372 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24373 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24374 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24375 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24395 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24464 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24520 This is longer now.
24525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24576 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24577 This is longer now.
24582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24608 \begin_layout Standard
24609 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
24610 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
24614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24615 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
24616 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
24622 Selection with the mouse or with
24626 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
24627 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
24628 the selection from outside the table.
24631 \begin_layout Section
24633 \begin_inset Index idx
24636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24652 \begin_layout Subsection
24656 \begin_layout Standard
24657 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
24658 have a fixed location.
24660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24667 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
24675 \begin_inset space ~
24680 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
24681 too many notes on the current page.
24684 \begin_layout Standard
24685 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
24686 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
24687 and pages without text.
24688 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
24689 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
24690 Floats are therefore numbered.
24691 Referencing is described in section
24692 \begin_inset space ~
24696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24698 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24705 \begin_layout Standard
24706 To insert a float, use the menu
24708 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24712 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
24713 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
24715 After the label you can insert the caption text.
24716 \begin_inset Index idx
24719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24725 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
24726 paragraph within the float.
24727 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
24728 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
24729 left-clicking on the box label.
24730 A closed float box looks like this:
24731 \begin_inset Graphics
24732 filename clipart/float.png
24737 – a gray button with a red label.
24740 \begin_layout Standard
24741 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
24743 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
24746 \begin_layout Subsection
24748 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24750 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24755 \begin_inset Index idx
24758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24759 Floats ! Figure floats
24767 \begin_layout Standard
24769 \begin_inset space ~
24773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24775 reference "fig:A-star-in"
24779 was created using the menu
24781 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24782 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24788 arg "float-insert figure"
24792 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
24795 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24801 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24805 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
24806 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
24808 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24810 \begin_inset space ~
24818 arg "layout-paragraph"
24824 \begin_layout Standard
24825 \begin_inset Float figure
24832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24834 \begin_inset Graphics
24835 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24845 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24848 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24850 name "fig:A-star-in"
24867 \begin_layout Standard
24868 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
24869 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
24871 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24880 ) and refer to it using the menu
24882 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24888 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24892 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
24893 vague references like
24894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24901 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
24902 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
24904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24912 For more about cross-references, see section
24913 \begin_inset space ~
24917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24919 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24926 \begin_layout Standard
24927 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
24928 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
24929 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
24930 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
24931 as described in section
24932 \begin_inset space ~
24936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24938 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
24944 \begin_inset space ~
24948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24950 reference "fig:Two-images"
24954 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
24955 You can also set the images one below the other.
24957 \begin_inset space ~
24961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24963 reference "fig:Undefinable"
24968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24970 reference "fig:Star"
24974 are the subfigures.
24977 \begin_layout Standard
24978 \begin_inset Float figure
24985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24986 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24990 \begin_inset Float figure
24997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24998 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25001 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25003 name "fig:Undefinable"
25015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25016 \begin_inset Graphics
25017 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
25029 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25033 \begin_inset Float figure
25040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25041 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25059 \begin_inset Graphics
25060 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25072 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25079 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25082 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25084 name "fig:Two-images"
25101 \begin_layout Subsection
25103 \begin_inset Index idx
25106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25107 Floats ! Table floats
25115 \begin_layout Standard
25116 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25118 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25119 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25122 or the toolbar button
25125 arg "float-insert table"
25129 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25130 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25131 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25133 \begin_inset space ~
25137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25139 reference "tab:Table-float"
25146 \begin_layout Standard
25147 \begin_inset Float table
25154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25155 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25158 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25160 name "tab:Table-float"
25172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25174 \begin_inset Tabular
25175 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25176 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25177 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25178 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25179 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25306 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25327 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25330 \end{array}\right]$
25338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25351 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25372 \begin_layout Subsection
25374 \begin_inset Index idx
25377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25386 \begin_layout Standard
25388 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25389 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25390 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25392 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25400 \begin_inset space ~
25408 \begin_layout Section
25410 \begin_inset Index idx
25413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25422 \begin_layout Standard
25424 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25426 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25427 \begin_inset space \space{}
25434 \begin_layout Standard
25435 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25436 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25438 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25442 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25443 and its alignment within the page.
25446 \begin_layout Standard
25448 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25458 height_special "totalheight"
25463 backgroundcolor "none"
25466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25469 This is a minipage.
25470 The text is set in an italic style.
25473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25476 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25477 another formatting.
25485 \begin_layout Standard
25486 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25489 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25493 as described in section
25494 \begin_inset space ~
25498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25500 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25505 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25511 \begin_layout Standard
25512 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25522 height_special "totalheight"
25527 backgroundcolor "none"
25530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25531 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25532 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25538 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25542 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25552 height_special "totalheight"
25557 backgroundcolor "none"
25560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25561 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25562 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25570 \begin_layout Standard
25571 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25577 \begin_layout Standard
25578 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25580 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
25587 \begin_inset space ~
25595 \begin_layout Chapter
25596 Mathematical Formulas
25597 \begin_inset Index idx
25600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25607 \begin_inset Index idx
25610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25641 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
25648 \begin_layout Standard
25649 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
25654 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
25657 \begin_layout Section
25659 \begin_inset Index idx
25662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25671 \begin_layout Standard
25672 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
25685 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
25687 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
25688 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
25689 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
25691 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25697 \begin_layout Standard
25698 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
25702 \begin_inset space ~
25707 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
25710 \begin_layout Standard
25711 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
25712 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
25715 \begin_layout Standard
25716 This is a line with an inline formula
25717 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
25723 \begin_layout Standard
25724 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
25725 paragraph, like this one:
25726 \begin_inset Formula
25733 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
25736 \begin_layout Standard
25738 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
25740 For example, typing
25741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25754 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
25755 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
25759 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
25762 \begin_inset space ~
25770 \begin_layout Subsection
25771 Navigating in Formulas
25772 \begin_inset Index idx
25775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25784 \begin_layout Standard
25785 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
25786 achieved with the arrow keys.
25788 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
25789 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
25794 will leave a formula construct (a square root
25795 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
25799 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
25803 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25806 \end{array}\right]$
25814 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
25819 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
25820 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
25823 \begin_layout Standard
25828 , printed in this document as
25829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25833 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25840 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
25841 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
25842 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
25847 For example, if you want
25848 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
25856 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25866 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25870 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25875 , since in the latter case only the
25878 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
25883 will be under the square root sign:
25884 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
25890 \begin_layout Standard
25891 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
25893 \begin_inset Formula
25895 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25904 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
25905 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
25908 \begin_layout Subsection
25912 \begin_layout Standard
25913 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
25914 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
25918 and a cursor movement key to select text.
25919 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
25920 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
25921 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
25922 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
25926 \begin_layout Subsection
25927 Exponents and Subscripts
25928 \begin_inset Index idx
25931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25938 \begin_inset Index idx
25941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25950 \begin_layout Standard
25951 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
25954 arg "math-superscript"
25960 arg "math-subscript"
25963 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
25965 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
25968 , type in a formula
25971 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25981 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
25987 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
25991 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
25997 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26003 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
26005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26012 , you have to use an extra
26016 to separate the circumflex and the character.
26017 For example, if you want
26018 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
26024 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26030 Subscripts are similar: To get
26031 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
26037 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26045 \begin_layout Subsection
26047 \begin_inset Index idx
26050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26059 \begin_layout Standard
26060 Create a fraction either with the command
26066 or by using the icon
26069 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26075 \begin_inset space ~
26081 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26082 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26083 To move it to the bottom, simply press
26088 To move back up, press
26093 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
26094 \begin_inset Formula
26096 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26099 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26107 \begin_layout Subsection
26109 \begin_inset Index idx
26112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26121 \begin_layout Standard
26122 Roots can be created using the
26125 \begin_inset space ~
26133 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26139 arg "math-insert \\root"
26161 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26167 always produces a square root.
26170 \begin_layout Subsection
26171 Operators with Limits
26172 \begin_inset Index idx
26175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26182 \begin_inset Index idx
26185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26192 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26194 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26201 \begin_layout Standard
26203 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26207 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26210 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26211 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26212 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26213 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26214 The sum operator will automatically place its
26215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26222 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26224 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26228 \begin_inset Formula
26230 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26235 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26239 \begin_layout Standard
26240 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26242 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26243 behind the operator and using the menu
26245 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26246 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26248 \begin_inset space ~
26252 \begin_inset space ~
26266 \begin_layout Standard
26267 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26276 \begin_inset Index idx
26279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26286 \begin_inset Formula
26288 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26293 which will place the
26294 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26306 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26307 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26313 \begin_layout Standard
26314 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26321 Have a look at section
26322 \begin_inset space ~
26326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26328 reference "subsec:Functions"
26332 for an explanation of function macros.
26335 \begin_layout Subsection
26337 \begin_inset Index idx
26340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26349 \begin_layout Standard
26350 Most math symbols can be found in the
26353 \begin_inset space ~
26358 under one of several categories; including
26375 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26379 \begin_layout Standard
26380 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26381 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26382 don't have to use the
26385 \begin_inset space ~
26390 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26392 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26395 \begin_layout Subsection
26397 \begin_inset Index idx
26400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26409 \begin_layout Standard
26410 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26416 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26422 \begin_inset space ~
26430 arg "math-insert \\space"
26434 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26435 For example, the sequence
26440 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26443 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26445 \begin_inset Graphics
26446 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26451 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26452 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26453 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26454 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26455 , because they are negative
26457 Here are two examples:
26460 \begin_layout Standard
26470 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26476 \begin_layout Standard
26486 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26492 \begin_layout Subsection
26494 \begin_inset Index idx
26497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26504 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26506 name "subsec:Functions"
26513 \begin_layout Standard
26517 \begin_inset space ~
26522 contains under the button
26525 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26528 a number of function macros, such as
26529 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26533 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26541 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26548 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26549 avoid confusions, because
26550 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26554 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26560 \begin_layout Standard
26561 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26563 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26567 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26573 \begin_layout Standard
26574 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26575 are placed, as described in section
26576 \begin_inset space ~
26580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26582 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26589 \begin_layout Subsection
26591 \begin_inset Index idx
26594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26603 \begin_layout Standard
26604 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
26606 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
26607 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26608 commands, for example, to enter
26609 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26612 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
26613 Our example is entered by typing
26618 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26625 \begin_inset space ~
26629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26631 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
26635 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
26638 \begin_layout Standard
26639 \begin_inset Float table
26646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26647 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26650 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26652 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
26656 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
26664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26666 \begin_inset Tabular
26667 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
26668 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26669 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26670 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26671 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26755 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26809 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
26819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26863 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
26873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26917 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
26927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26971 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
26981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27025 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
27035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27079 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27133 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27187 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27232 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27253 \begin_layout Standard
27254 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27257 \begin_inset space ~
27265 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27268 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27272 \begin_layout Section
27273 Brackets and Delimiters
27274 \begin_inset Index idx
27277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27284 \begin_inset Index idx
27287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27294 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27296 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27303 \begin_layout Standard
27304 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27306 For some purposes, using just the keys
27311 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27312 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27313 toolbar delimiter icon
27316 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27320 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27321 \begin_inset Formula
27323 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27331 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27332 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27336 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27339 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27345 \begin_inset Formula
27347 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27355 \begin_layout Standard
27356 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27357 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27361 \begin_layout Standard
27362 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27363 left side and right side.
27364 If you use the option
27367 \begin_inset space ~
27372 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27373 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27375 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27380 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27381 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27384 \begin_layout Standard
27385 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27386 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27387 is to go inside the brackets.
27388 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27393 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27394 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27395 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27399 arg "math-delim ( )"
27405 \begin_layout Section
27406 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27407 \begin_inset Index idx
27410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27417 \begin_inset Index idx
27420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27427 \begin_inset Index idx
27430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27431 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27439 \begin_layout Standard
27440 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27444 \begin_inset space ~
27452 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27456 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27457 Here is an example:
27458 \begin_inset Formula
27460 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27469 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27470 \begin_inset space ~
27474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27476 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27481 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27482 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27483 This alignment is set in the box
27488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27537 for every column as default.
27538 For example, the sequence
27539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27550 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27551 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27552 corresponds to the relevant column.
27553 The result will look like this:
27554 \begin_inset Formula
27557 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27558 column & has & has\,right\\
27559 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27568 \begin_layout Standard
27569 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27572 arg "newline-insert newline"
27575 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27576 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27578 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27581 or the math toolbar.
27584 \begin_layout Standard
27585 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
27586 It can be created with the menu
27588 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27589 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27591 \begin_inset space ~
27603 Here is an example:
27604 \begin_inset Formula
27618 \begin_layout Standard
27619 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27622 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
27625 arg "newline-insert newline"
27629 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
27634 arg "newline-insert newline"
27637 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
27638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27645 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
27646 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
27647 A new row is created by every further entry of
27650 arg "newline-insert newline"
27654 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
27655 Here is an example:
27656 \begin_inset Formula
27658 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
27659 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
27664 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
27665 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
27666 \begin_inset Formula
27668 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
27676 \begin_layout Standard
27677 The multi-line formula type described here is called
27684 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
27685 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
27686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27688 reference "eq:asquared"
27693 The other types are described in section
27694 \begin_inset space ~
27698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27700 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27707 \begin_layout Section
27708 Formula Numbering and Referencing
27709 \begin_inset Index idx
27712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27713 Math ! Formula numbering
27719 \begin_inset Index idx
27722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27723 Math ! Referencing formulas
27729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27731 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27738 \begin_layout Standard
27739 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
27741 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27742 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27744 \begin_inset space ~
27748 \begin_inset space ~
27756 arg "math-number-toggle"
27760 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27761 within parentheses.
27762 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
27763 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
27764 the document class.
27765 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
27766 separated by a dot:
27767 \begin_inset Formula
27777 arg "math-number-toggle"
27780 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
27781 You can only number displayed formulas.
27784 \begin_layout Standard
27785 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
27787 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27788 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27790 \begin_inset space ~
27794 \begin_inset space ~
27802 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
27805 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
27806 \begin_inset Formula
27809 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
27815 To number all lines use the shortcut
27818 arg "math-number-toggle"
27824 \begin_layout Standard
27825 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27828 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
27829 A label is inserted with the menu
27831 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27840 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
27841 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
27842 It is recommended that you use the suggested
27843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27854 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
27855 label type when you have many labels in your document.
27856 We inserted in the following example the label
27857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27864 in the second line:
27865 \begin_inset Formula
27867 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
27868 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
27873 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
27874 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
27875 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
27877 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27879 \begin_inset space ~
27887 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27891 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
27892 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27893 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
27894 as the formula number:
27897 \begin_layout Standard
27898 This is a cross-reference to equation (
27899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27901 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27908 \begin_layout Standard
27909 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
27910 's cross-reference box are described in section
27911 \begin_inset space ~
27915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27917 reference "sec:Cross-References"
27922 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
27930 \begin_layout Section
27931 User defined math macros
27932 \begin_inset Index idx
27935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27944 \begin_layout Standard
27946 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
27947 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
27948 Math macros are explained in section
27951 \begin_inset space ~
27963 \begin_layout Section
27967 \begin_layout Subsection
27969 \begin_inset Index idx
27972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27981 \begin_layout Standard
27982 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
27983 To set a font in a formula, use the
27986 \begin_inset space ~
27994 arg "math-insert \\font"
27997 , or enter its command, listed in table
27998 \begin_inset space ~
28002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28004 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28011 \begin_layout Standard
28012 \begin_inset Float table
28019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28020 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28023 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28025 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28029 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
28037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28039 \begin_inset Tabular
28040 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
28041 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28042 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28043 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28075 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28102 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28129 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28162 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28189 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28216 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28250 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28272 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
28273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28278 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595530
28286 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
28294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28299 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595587
28311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28315 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28349 \begin_layout Standard
28350 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28358 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28361 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
28365 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
28384 \begin_layout Standard
28385 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28386 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28391 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28392 space when you need a space in the box.
28393 Here is an example where
28394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28405 denotes the set of numbers:
28406 \begin_inset Formula
28408 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28416 \begin_layout Standard
28417 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28418 You can, for example, put a character in
28427 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28431 \begin_inset Newline newline
28434 So it is better not to use this feature.
28437 \begin_layout Standard
28438 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28439 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28443 \begin_inset Newline newline
28446 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28452 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28453 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28459 \begin_layout Standard
28466 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28469 \begin_layout Standard
28470 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28472 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28473 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28475 \begin_inset space ~
28483 \begin_layout Subsection
28485 \begin_inset Index idx
28488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28497 \begin_layout Standard
28498 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28500 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28504 \begin_inset space ~
28508 \begin_inset space ~
28516 \begin_inset space ~
28524 arg "math-insert \\font"
28528 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28529 in black instead of blue.
28530 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28531 Here is an example:
28532 \begin_inset Formula
28535 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28536 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28545 \begin_layout Subsection
28547 \begin_inset Index idx
28550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28559 \begin_layout Standard
28560 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
28561 automatically chosen in most situations.
28579 For most characters,
28587 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
28588 and certain other structures, are set larger in
28593 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
28594 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28595 thinks are appropriate.
28596 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
28599 arg "math-insert \\style"
28603 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
28604 For example, you can set
28605 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
28608 , which is normally in
28617 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
28621 The four styles are used in the following example:
28624 \begin_layout Standard
28625 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
28629 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
28633 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
28637 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
28643 \begin_layout Standard
28644 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
28645 is set in a particular size with the menu
28647 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28649 \begin_inset space ~
28654 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
28655 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
28656 will be adjusted to correspond.
28657 As an example here is a formula in the font size
28658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28668 \begin_layout Standard
28672 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
28678 \begin_layout Section
28679 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28681 \begin_inset Index idx
28684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28691 \begin_inset Index idx
28694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28703 \begin_layout Standard
28705 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
28706 that are in common use.
28709 \begin_layout Subsection
28710 Enabling AMS-Support
28713 \begin_layout Standard
28714 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
28715 the document by selecting the checkbox
28718 \begin_inset space ~
28722 \begin_inset space ~
28726 \begin_inset space ~
28733 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28737 \begin_inset Index idx
28740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28741 Document ! Settings
28749 \begin_inset space ~
28755 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28756 -errors in formulas,
28757 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
28760 \begin_layout Subsection
28762 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28764 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28769 \begin_inset Index idx
28772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28773 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28781 \begin_layout Standard
28782 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28783 provides a selection of different formula types.
28785 allows you to choose between
28806 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
28807 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28814 , for an explanation of these formula types.
28817 \begin_layout Chapter
28821 \begin_layout Section
28823 \begin_inset Index idx
28826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28833 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28835 name "sec:Cross-References"
28842 \begin_layout Standard
28843 One of \SpecialChar LyX
28844 's strengths is cross-references.
28845 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
28847 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
28848 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
28849 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
28852 \begin_layout Enumerate
28856 \begin_layout Enumerate
28857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28859 name "enu:Second-item"
28866 \begin_layout Enumerate
28870 \begin_layout Standard
28871 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
28873 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28876 or by pressing the toolbar button
28883 A gray label box like this:
28884 \begin_inset Graphics
28885 filename clipart/label.png
28889 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
28891 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
28893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28926 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
28927 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
28929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28943 \begin_layout Standard
28944 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
28946 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28949 or the toolbar button
28952 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28956 A gray cross-reference box like this:
28957 \begin_inset Graphics
28958 filename clipart/reference.png
28962 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
28964 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
28965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28977 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
28981 \begin_layout Standard
28982 As an alternative to
28984 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28987 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
28992 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
28993 to the actual cursor position via the menu
28995 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29007 \begin_layout Standard
29008 Here is our cross-reference: Item
29009 \begin_inset space ~
29013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29015 reference "enu:Second-item"
29022 \begin_layout Standard
29023 It is recommended to use a protected space
29027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29028 described in section
29029 \begin_inset space ~
29033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29035 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
29044 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
29045 line breaks between them.
29048 \begin_layout Standard
29049 There are eight formats of cross-references:
29052 \begin_layout Description
29053 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
29054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29056 reference "fig:Two-images"
29063 \begin_layout Description
29064 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
29065 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
29067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29077 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29084 \begin_layout Description
29085 <page>: prints the page number: Page
29086 \begin_inset space ~
29090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29091 LatexCommand pageref
29092 reference "fig:Two-images"
29099 \begin_layout Description
29101 \begin_inset space ~
29105 \begin_inset space ~
29108 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
29109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29110 LatexCommand vpageref
29111 reference "fig:Two-images"
29116 \begin_inset Newline newline
29119 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
29120 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
29121 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
29122 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
29123 it prints “on the next page”.
29124 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
29127 \begin_layout Description
29129 \begin_inset space ~
29133 \begin_inset space ~
29137 \begin_inset space ~
29140 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
29141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29143 reference "fig:Two-images"
29148 \begin_inset Newline newline
29151 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
29157 ; otherwise it behaves like
29161 \begin_inset space ~
29165 \begin_inset space ~
29174 \begin_layout Description
29176 \begin_inset space ~
29179 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
29180 \begin_inset Newline newline
29184 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29192 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29202 \begin_inset Index idx
29205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29207 packages ! prettyref
29213 \begin_inset Index idx
29216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29218 packages ! refstyle
29229 \begin_inset Newline newline
29232 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29233 -package should be used for this feature by setting
29236 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
29240 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29241 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29249 is the default and preferred because
29253 supports only English documents.
29254 The format is specified by using the command
29266 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29267 preamble of the document.
29268 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
29270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29286 \begin_inset Newline newline
29293 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29298 \begin_inset Newline newline
29309 predefines reference formats for all available types.
29310 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
29312 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
29313 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
29318 , you might do so as follows:
29319 \begin_inset Newline newline
29326 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
29331 \begin_inset Newline newline
29334 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
29335 the package documentation
29336 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29338 key "prettyref,refstyle"
29344 \begin_inset Newline newline
29355 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
29362 \begin_layout Description
29364 \begin_inset space ~
29367 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
29368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29369 LatexCommand nameref
29370 reference "fig:Two-images"
29377 \begin_layout Description
29379 \begin_inset space ~
29382 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29383 label for the reference:
29384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29385 LatexCommand labelonly
29386 reference "fig:Two-images"
29391 \begin_inset Newline newline
29394 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29395 Code, if you want to issue a command
29396 that \SpecialChar LyX
29402 , then you may want to use the
29405 \begin_inset space ~
29410 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29420 This is the form needed for e.
29421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29425 \begin_inset space \space{}
29432 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29433 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29435 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29439 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29443 \begin_layout Standard
29444 You can only use the style
29448 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29452 is always possible.
29455 \begin_layout Standard
29456 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29457 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29459 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29460 \begin_inset space ~
29464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29466 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29473 \begin_layout Standard
29474 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29478 \begin_inset space ~
29482 \begin_inset space ~
29487 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29488 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29491 \begin_inset space ~
29496 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29497 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29500 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29506 \begin_layout Standard
29507 You can change labels at any time.
29508 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29509 do not need to think about this.
29512 \begin_layout Standard
29513 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29515 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29519 \begin_layout Standard
29520 References are described in detail in the section
29521 \begin_inset space ~
29531 \begin_inset space ~
29539 \begin_layout Section
29540 Table of Contents and other Listings
29541 \begin_inset Index idx
29544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29551 \begin_inset Index idx
29554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29555 Navigating ! Outline
29561 \begin_inset Index idx
29564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29571 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29580 \begin_layout Subsection
29582 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29584 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
29591 \begin_layout Standard
29592 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
29594 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29595 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
29597 \begin_inset space ~
29601 \begin_inset space ~
29607 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
29609 If you click on it, the
29613 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
29614 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
29615 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
29617 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29619 \begin_inset space ~
29624 that is described in section
29625 \begin_inset space ~
29629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29631 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
29638 \begin_layout Standard
29639 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
29640 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
29642 \begin_inset space ~
29646 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29648 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
29652 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
29654 \begin_inset space ~
29658 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29660 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
29664 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
29666 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
29669 \begin_layout Subsection
29670 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
29671 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29673 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29680 \begin_layout Standard
29681 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
29683 You can insert them via the
29685 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29686 List/Contents/References
29689 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
29692 \begin_layout Section
29693 URLs and Hyperlinks
29694 \begin_inset Index idx
29697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29704 \begin_inset Index idx
29707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29716 \begin_layout Subsection
29718 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29727 \begin_layout Standard
29728 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
29730 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29736 \begin_layout Standard
29737 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
29739 \begin_inset Flex URL
29742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29744 https://www.lyx.org
29752 \begin_layout Standard
29753 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
29759 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
29763 \begin_layout Standard
29764 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29772 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29781 \begin_layout Subsection
29783 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29785 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
29792 \begin_layout Standard
29793 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
29795 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29798 or with the toolbar button
29805 The appearing dialog has two fields:
29814 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
29815 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
29816 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29818 name "LyX's homepage"
29819 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29824 , an Email address like this:
29825 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29827 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
29828 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
29834 , or a link to a file.
29839 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29847 \begin_layout Standard
29848 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
29850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29861 to the link target.
29864 \begin_layout Standard
29865 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
29866 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
29867 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
29868 the text style dialog.
29869 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
29873 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29875 name "LyX's homepage"
29876 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29884 \begin_layout Standard
29885 The link text color can be changed, when the option
29889 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
29891 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29892 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29896 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
29898 \begin_inset Newline newline
29906 \begin_inset Newline newline
29913 in the PDF Properties dialog.
29914 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
29918 \begin_layout Section
29920 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
29922 \begin_inset Index idx
29925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29934 name "sec:Counters"
29941 \begin_layout Standard
29943 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374084
29944 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
29945 is its ability to manage counters.
29946 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
29947 modify counters directly.
29948 This can be done in LyX using the counter inset, which is accessible from
29950 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero); to add
29951 to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be negative);
29952 to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
29953 These effects can also be limited to LyX itself.
29954 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in LaTeX.
29958 \begin_layout Standard
29960 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
29961 There are five commands you can use:
29964 \begin_layout Enumerate
29966 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
29967 Set counter: Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
29970 \begin_layout Enumerate
29972 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
29973 Increase counter: Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or
29974 to subtract, if you choose a negative number)
29977 \begin_layout Enumerate
29979 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
29980 Reset to zero: Sets the value of the counter to 0.
29983 \begin_layout Enumerate
29985 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
29986 Save value of counter: Saves the value of the counter so that it can later
29990 \begin_layout Enumerate
29992 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
29993 Restore value of counter: Restores the previously saved value.
29996 \begin_layout Standard
29998 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
29999 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all
30000 those that are available in the current document class.
30005 \begin_layout Section
30007 \begin_inset Index idx
30010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30017 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30019 name "sec:Appendices"
30026 \begin_layout Standard
30027 Appendices are created with the menu
30029 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30031 \begin_inset space ~
30035 \begin_inset space ~
30041 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
30042 as the appendix part of the book.
30043 This part is marked with a red borderline.
30046 \begin_layout Standard
30047 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
30048 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
30049 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
30050 and the subsection number.
30051 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
30055 \begin_layout Standard
30057 \begin_inset space ~
30061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30063 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
30071 \begin_inset space ~
30075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30077 reference "subsec:Export"
30084 \begin_layout Section
30086 \begin_inset Index idx
30089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30096 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30098 name "sec:Bibliography"
30105 \begin_layout Standard
30106 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
30108 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
30109 \begin_inset space ~
30113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30115 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30122 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
30127 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
30128 \begin_inset space ~
30132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30134 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
30139 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
30140 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
30141 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
30145 using a bibliography database.
30148 \begin_layout Standard
30149 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
30150 use two bibliographies in this document, a
30154 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
30155 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
30156 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
30157 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
30158 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
30161 \begin_layout Subsection
30162 The Bibliography Environment
30163 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30165 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30172 \begin_layout Standard
30177 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
30179 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
30188 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
30190 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
30191 of ASCII characters only.
30195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30197 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30200 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
30206 \begin_inset Newline newline
30210 \begin_inset Flex URL
30213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30215 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
30225 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30235 , a short form of its title, as the key.
30236 \begin_inset Newline newline
30243 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
30244 the number of the entry.
30249 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30258 \begin_layout Standard
30259 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
30261 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30264 or the toolbar button
30267 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
30271 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
30272 containing the available citations.
30273 Select one or more keys from the list and
30283 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
30284 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
30288 \begin_layout Standard
30289 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
30290 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
30291 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
30293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30303 \begin_layout Standard
30307 Companion Second Edition
30310 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30312 key "latexcompanion"
30320 \begin_layout Standard
30321 The \SpecialChar LyX
30322 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
30323 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30333 \begin_layout Standard
30334 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30341 \begin_inset Index idx
30344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30353 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
30354 the label needs to be given the form
30355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30366 Author A and Author B(Year)
30367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30374 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
30381 \begin_inset space ~
30386 in the document settings
30387 \begin_inset Index idx
30390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30391 Document ! Settings
30398 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
30400 \begin_inset space ~
30406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30408 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
30416 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
30418 Once you have done that, the
30422 dialog has three input fields instead of the
30439 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
30440 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
30441 These two are madatory.
30442 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
30445 Baker, Jones, and Williams
30447 ) and in abrreviated form (
30454 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
30455 add the abbreviated form to
30459 and the full list to the optional
30467 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
30468 If specified like this,
30470 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
30471 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
30474 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30481 is specified, toggling
30482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30489 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
30490 full and abbreviated list
30494 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
30495 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
30496 the citation references.
30497 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
30502 \begin_layout Standard
30503 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
30506 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30508 \begin_inset space ~
30516 arg "layout-paragraph"
30520 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
30523 \begin_layout Subsection
30524 Bibliography databases
30525 \begin_inset Index idx
30528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30529 Bibliography ! Databases
30535 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30537 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30544 \begin_layout Standard
30545 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
30550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30551 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
30553 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
30554 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
30559 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
30561 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
30562 your working field in a database.
30563 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
30564 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
30565 list for that document.
30566 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
30570 \begin_layout Standard
30571 The database is a text file with the file extension
30572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30583 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
30584 The format is explained in
30585 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30592 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30594 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30596 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
30602 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
30603 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
30604 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
30606 \begin_inset Flex URL
30609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30611 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
30619 \begin_layout Standard
30621 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
30622 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30623 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
30625 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
30627 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
30628 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
30629 Those are addressed by
30634 \begin_inset Index idx
30637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30639 packages ! biblatex
30645 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30646 (although it has been significantly
30647 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30657 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30658 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30659 might conversely fail to correctly
30660 handle databases that use specific
30669 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
30673 \begin_layout Standard
30674 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30679 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
30681 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30685 \begin_inset Index idx
30688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30689 Document ! Settings
30701 \begin_inset space ~
30706 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30714 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30715 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30717 \begin_inset Index idx
30720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30721 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30730 \begin_layout Standard
30731 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30734 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30735 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30737 \begin_inset space ~
30743 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
30744 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30752 Add bibliography to TOC
30754 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
30759 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
30760 in the document or just the cited references.
30762 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
30767 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
30768 differ from the encoding of the document.
30773 \begin_layout Standard
30774 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30775 style file is a text file with the file extension
30776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30787 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
30788 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30789 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
30790 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
30792 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
30797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30798 For information on how this is done, have a look at
30799 \begin_inset Newline newline
30803 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30805 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
30815 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30820 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
30824 \begin_layout Standard
30825 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
30828 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30830 \begin_inset Index idx
30833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30834 Bibliography ! Biblatex
30840 \begin_inset Index idx
30843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30845 packages ! biblatex
30853 \begin_layout Standard
30854 Accessing a database via
30858 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30861 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30862 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30864 \begin_inset space ~
30870 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30871 you cannot select a
30876 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
30880 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30883 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
30884 As for the styles, note the following.
30889 \begin_layout Standard
30894 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
30896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30907 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
30908 file (text file with the file extension
30909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30920 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
30921 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
30923 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
30927 \begin_layout Standard
30932 styles are not set in the
30935 \begin_inset space ~
30940 dialog, but in the document settings.
30941 \begin_inset Index idx
30944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30945 Document ! Settings
30950 However, in the dialog in the
30954 field, which is only visible if you use
30958 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
30959 example how its heading will appear).
30960 These options are described in detail in the
30965 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30975 \begin_layout Standard
30976 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
30977 \begin_inset space ~
30981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30983 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30993 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30994 Bibliography Processors
30997 \begin_layout Standard
30998 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
30999 uses a bibliography processor,
31000 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
31001 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
31002 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31004 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
31005 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
31008 \begin_layout Standard
31009 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
31011 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
31012 You can do this on a general level in
31014 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31015 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31016 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31019 or for individual documents in
31021 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31022 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31026 The following variants are available by default:
31029 \begin_layout Description
31030 biber a specific, modern processor
31031 \begin_inset Index idx
31034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31041 developed exclusively for
31045 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31051 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
31056 makes use of; if you use the
31060 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
31067 \begin_layout Description
31068 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
31069 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
31070 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
31074 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
31077 \begin_layout Description
31078 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
31079 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
31083 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
31087 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
31091 features are supported.
31094 \begin_layout Standard
31095 By default (with the
31101 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31102 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31115 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31116 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31117 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31120 ), \SpecialChar LyX
31121 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
31134 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31135 -based bibliography styles).
31136 This should suit most needs.
31139 \begin_layout Standard
31140 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
31141 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
31142 (in \SpecialChar LyX
31147 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31148 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
31149 You can adjust it in
31151 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31152 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31153 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31159 \begin_layout Standard
31160 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
31161 can add below the selection.
31162 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
31163 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31169 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31179 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31183 \begin_layout Standard
31185 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
31187 These are explained in detail in section
31189 Customizing Bibliographies
31193 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31198 Additional Features
31203 \begin_layout Subsection
31205 \begin_inset Index idx
31208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31209 Bibliography ! Citation format
31215 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31217 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
31224 \begin_layout Standard
31225 Many different citation formats are common, e.
31226 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31230 \begin_inset space \space{}
31233 numerical citation (as
31234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31241 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
31242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31249 ) or author-year citations (as
31250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31259 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
31263 \begin_layout Standard
31264 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
31267 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31268 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31272 \begin_inset Index idx
31275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31276 Document ! Settings
31281 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
31287 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
31288 labels, is there to use
31291 \begin_inset space ~
31302 \begin_inset space ~
31307 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
31308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31310 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31317 \begin_layout Standard
31318 With a bibliography database (see
31319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31321 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31328 ) one has in contrary to the
31332 environment full access to the formatting styles.
31333 These style formats are available:
31336 \begin_layout Description
31338 \begin_inset space ~
31341 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31342 -based approached without any additional packages
31343 (simple numeric citations).
31346 \begin_layout Description
31347 Biblatex loads the package
31352 \begin_inset Index idx
31355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31357 packages ! biblatex
31362 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
31364 Biblatex citation style
31368 Biblatex bibliography style
31371 Options to the package
31375 can be entered in the
31382 \begin_layout Description
31384 \begin_inset space ~
31388 \begin_inset space ~
31391 mode) loads the package
31395 with the natbib compatibility mode.
31396 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
31408 behavior very closely.
31413 this option has some additional styles.
31418 styles are also supported by this variant.
31421 \begin_layout Description
31423 \begin_inset space ~
31426 (BibTeX) loads the package
31431 \begin_inset Index idx
31434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31441 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
31444 \begin_layout Description
31446 \begin_inset space ~
31449 (BibTeX) loads the package
31454 \begin_inset Index idx
31457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31464 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
31467 \begin_layout Standard
31476 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
31478 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
31487 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
31489 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
31490 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
31492 Biblatex citation style
31495 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
31501 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
31505 \begin_layout Standard
31506 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
31507 are available in the
31512 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
31513 a name prefix such as
31514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31529 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
31530 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31534 \begin_inset space \space{}
31538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31549 \begin_layout Standard
31550 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
31552 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31556 \begin_inset space \space{}
31559 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
31561 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31565 \begin_inset space \space{}
31569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31581 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31585 \begin_inset space ~
31593 \begin_inset space ~
31599 Here is a simple example where the text
31600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31604 \begin_inset space ~
31608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31611 appears after the reference:
31614 \begin_layout Quote
31616 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31619 key "latexcompanion"
31627 \begin_layout Standard
31628 All styles except for
31632 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
31634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31642 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
31646 \begin_layout Standard
31647 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
31648 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
31649 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
31654 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
31655 multi-citation (so-called
31656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31659 qualified citation lists
31660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31666 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
31671 dialog will display three columns in the field
31678 \begin_inset space ~
31686 \begin_inset space ~
31694 \begin_inset space ~
31700 If you double-click on an item's
31703 \begin_inset space ~
31711 \begin_inset space ~
31716 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
31719 General text before
31725 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
31728 \begin_layout Section
31730 \begin_inset Index idx
31733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31740 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31749 \begin_layout Standard
31750 An index entry is created if you use the menu
31752 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31754 \begin_inset space ~
31759 or the toolbar button
31766 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
31767 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
31768 by \SpecialChar LyX
31769 as the index entry.
31772 \begin_layout Standard
31773 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
31775 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31776 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31778 \begin_inset space ~
31784 A light blue box labeled
31785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31796 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
31797 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
31801 \begin_layout Standard
31802 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
31803 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31804 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
31805 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31807 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31809 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
31817 \begin_layout Subsection
31818 Grouping Index Entries
31819 \begin_inset Index idx
31822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31831 \begin_layout Standard
31832 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
31834 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
31835 lists under the entry
31836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31844 First we create the entry
31845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31853 \begin_inset space ~
31857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31859 reference "subsec:Lists"
31864 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
31865 \begin_inset space ~
31869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31871 reference "sec:Itemize"
31875 , we insert the command
31878 \begin_layout Standard
31884 \begin_layout Standard
31888 \begin_layout Standard
31894 \begin_layout Standard
31895 for the enumerated list in section
31896 \begin_inset space ~
31900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31902 reference "sec:Enumerate"
31909 \begin_layout Standard
31910 The exclamation mark
31911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31918 marks the grouping levels.
31919 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
31920 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
31921 If we don't have an index entry for
31922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31929 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
31932 \begin_layout Subsection
31934 \begin_inset Index idx
31937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31938 Index ! Page ranges
31946 \begin_layout Standard
31947 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
31949 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
31950 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
31951 an index entry in section
31952 \begin_inset space ~
31956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31958 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
31965 \begin_layout Standard
31968 Paragraph environments|(
31971 \begin_layout Standard
31972 and another entry at the end of section
31973 \begin_inset space ~
31977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31979 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
31986 \begin_layout Standard
31989 Paragraph environments|)
31992 \begin_layout Standard
31994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32017 respectively start and end the index range.
32018 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
32019 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
32020 the pages of the indexed document parts.
32021 An example is the index entry
32022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32025 Document ! Settings
32026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32032 \begin_layout Subsection
32034 \begin_inset Index idx
32037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32038 Index ! Cross referencing
32046 \begin_layout Standard
32047 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
32048 We referred for example in the index entry
32049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32057 \begin_inset space ~
32061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32063 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
32067 ) to the index entry
32068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32075 in the same section using the entry
32078 \begin_layout Standard
32081 GIF|see{Image formats}
32084 \begin_layout Standard
32085 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
32087 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
32088 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
32091 \begin_layout Subsection
32093 \begin_inset Index idx
32096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32097 Index ! Entry order
32105 \begin_layout Standard
32106 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
32107 follow the rules for the index order.
32108 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
32113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32114 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
32116 \begin_inset space ~
32120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32122 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32131 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
32132 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
32133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32157 \begin_inset Index idx
32160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32161 Dummy entries ! maïs
32167 \begin_inset Index idx
32170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32171 Dummy entries ! maître
32177 \begin_inset Index idx
32180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32181 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
32186 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
32187 maïs, maison, maître.
32188 To achieve this, we use the command
32191 \begin_layout Standard
32194 previous entry@current entry
32197 \begin_layout Standard
32198 In our case we want to have
32199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32214 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
32217 \begin_layout Standard
32223 \begin_layout Standard
32224 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
32225 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
32227 See the next subsection for an example.
32230 \begin_layout Subsection
32232 \begin_inset Index idx
32235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32236 Index ! Entry layout
32244 \begin_layout Standard
32245 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
32246 \begin_inset Index idx
32249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32252 This is an italic dummy entry
32257 You can also format the page number using the character
32258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32265 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32266 -command without a backslash.
32267 We can write for example
32270 \begin_layout Standard
32273 italic page number:|textit
32276 \begin_layout Standard
32277 to get the page number in italic.
32278 \begin_inset Index idx
32281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32282 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
32287 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
32288 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
32290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32306 \begin_inset space ~
32312 Have a look at section
32313 \begin_inset space ~
32317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32319 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32323 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32327 \begin_layout Standard
32328 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32336 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
32340 to generate the index, see section
32341 \begin_inset space ~
32345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32347 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32356 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
32361 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
32362 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32365 key "latexcompanion"
32378 \begin_layout Standard
32379 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
32381 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
32382 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
32383 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
32384 If so, put the following in the preamble
32387 \begin_layout Standard
32399 \begin_layout Standard
32403 \begin_layout Standard
32409 \begin_layout Standard
32410 in the index entry.
32411 \begin_inset Index idx
32414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32415 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
32420 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
32421 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
32422 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
32425 \begin_layout Standard
32426 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
32427 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
32428 a bold font for all index entries.
32429 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
32441 documentation for details,
32442 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32444 key "makeindex,xindy"
32452 \begin_layout Subsection
32454 \begin_inset Index idx
32457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32464 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32466 name "subsec:Index-Program"
32473 \begin_layout Standard
32474 If the index generation program
32478 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
32479 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
32483 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32484 distribution, is used.
32488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32493 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
32494 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
32495 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
32496 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
32497 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
32507 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
32509 dialog, see section
32510 \begin_inset space ~
32514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32516 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32521 The available options are listed and explained in
32522 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32524 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
32530 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
32534 \begin_layout Standard
32535 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
32536 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
32539 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32540 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32544 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
32545 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
32548 \begin_layout Subsection
32552 \begin_layout Standard
32553 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
32554 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
32555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32562 next to the standard index.
32564 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
32565 that add this feature.
32572 \begin_inset Index idx
32575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32577 packages ! splitidx
32582 package to generate multiple indexes.
32583 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
32588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32589 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
32591 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32599 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32600 style, but it also includes
32601 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
32602 Please consult the package's manual for details.
32610 \begin_layout Standard
32611 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
32612 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
32614 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32615 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32618 and select the option
32620 Use multiple Indexes
32627 already contains the standard index
32628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32636 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
32637 also appear as a heading) to the
32641 input field and press the
32646 The new index now also appears in the list.
32647 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
32648 label color to the new index.
32651 \begin_layout Standard
32652 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
32655 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32656 List/Contents/References
32662 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
32663 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
32664 are additional features:
32667 \begin_layout Itemize
32668 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
32669 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
32672 \begin_layout Itemize
32673 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
32674 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
32679 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
32680 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
32681 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
32682 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
32685 \begin_layout Itemize
32690 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
32691 code in the name of the index.
32694 \begin_layout Section
32695 Nomenclature/Glossary
32696 \begin_inset Index idx
32699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32706 \begin_inset Index idx
32709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32738 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32740 name "sec:Nomenclature"
32747 \begin_layout Standard
32748 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
32749 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
32750 called nomenclature or glossary.
32753 \begin_layout Standard
32754 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32761 \begin_inset Index idx
32764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32772 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32774 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32781 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32785 \begin_layout Standard
32786 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
32787 and then use the menu
32789 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32795 \begin_inset space ~
32800 or the toolbar button
32803 arg "nomencl-insert"
32808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32819 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
32822 \begin_layout Standard
32823 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
32824 The first is the term or
32828 that you wish to define.
32833 of the term or symbol.
32836 \begin_layout Standard
32837 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32845 To use \SpecialChar TeX
32846 code for nomenclature entries the option
32850 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
32858 \begin_layout Subsection
32859 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
32860 \begin_inset Index idx
32863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32864 Nomenclature ! Layout
32872 \begin_layout Standard
32873 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
32877 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
32880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32884 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32892 \begin_inset Newline newline
32900 \begin_inset Newline newline
32906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32913 character starts/ends the formula.
32914 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32915 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
32917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32927 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
32937 \begin_layout Standard
32938 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32939 syntax is given in section
32940 \begin_inset space ~
32944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32946 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32953 \begin_layout Standard
32957 \begin_inset space ~
32962 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
32964 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
32965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32969 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32976 in this document is:
32977 \begin_inset Newline newline
32982 dummy entry for the character
32987 \begin_inset Newline newline
32999 \begin_inset space ~
33009 font use the command
33038 \begin_layout Standard
33039 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
33040 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33044 \begin_inset space \space{}
33048 \begin_inset Newline newline
33064 \begin_inset Newline newline
33067 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
33068 This command will make the font of all symbols
33075 \begin_inset space ~
33083 \begin_layout Standard
33084 If the characters |
33085 \begin_inset space \space{}
33089 \begin_inset space \space{}
33093 \begin_inset space \space{}
33097 \begin_inset space \space{}
33101 \begin_inset space \space{}
33104 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
33105 code they need to be escaped
33106 by adding a quote character in front of them.
33107 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33108 LatexCommand nomenclature
33109 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
33110 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
33118 \begin_layout Subsection
33119 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
33120 \begin_inset Index idx
33123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33124 Nomenclature ! Sort order
33132 \begin_layout Standard
33133 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33134 -code of the symbol
33136 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
33138 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
33141 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33142 LatexCommand nomenclature
33144 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
33152 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33156 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33157 LatexCommand nomenclature
33160 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
33166 They will be sorted by
33167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33193 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33196 will be sorted before the
33200 since the character
33201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33208 is considered in sorting.
33211 \begin_layout Standard
33212 To control the sort order, you can edit the
33215 \begin_inset space ~
33220 field of the nomenclature dialog.
33221 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
33223 For the example given, you can insert
33227 in this field for the
33228 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33235 will be located before
33236 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33242 \begin_layout Standard
33243 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
33248 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33258 \begin_layout Subsection
33259 Nomenclature Options
33260 \begin_inset Index idx
33263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33264 Nomenclature ! Options
33270 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33272 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
33279 \begin_layout Standard
33284 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
33285 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
33288 \begin_layout Description
33289 refeq Appends the phrase
33290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33305 to every nomenclature entry, where
33311 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
33314 \begin_layout Description
33315 refpage Appends the phrase
33316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33331 to every nomenclature entry, where
33337 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
33340 \begin_layout Description
33341 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
33344 \begin_layout Standard
33345 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
33346 class options list in the
33348 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33352 In this document the options
33359 \begin_layout Standard
33360 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33366 \begin_layout Standard
33367 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
33368 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
33373 field in the nomenclature dialog:
33376 \begin_layout Description
33386 \begin_layout Description
33389 nomrefpage Like the
33396 \begin_layout Description
33399 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
33408 \begin_layout Description
33412 \begin_inset space ~
33418 \begin_inset space ~
33423 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
33426 \begin_layout Standard
33428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33435 are automatically translated for most document languages.
33436 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
33440 \begin_layout Standard
33449 \begin_inset Newline newline
33455 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33459 \begin_inset space ~
33471 unskip, see equation
33474 \begin_inset Newline newline
33481 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33482 \begin_inset Newline newline
33488 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33492 \begin_inset space ~
33509 \begin_layout Standard
33510 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
33513 \begin_inset space ~
33518 in the document settings under
33521 \begin_inset space ~
33529 \begin_layout Standard
33537 \begin_inset Newline newline
33541 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33545 \begin_inset space ~
33557 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
33559 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
33560 \begin_inset Newline newline
33567 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33568 \begin_inset Newline newline
33572 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33576 \begin_inset space ~
33588 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
33593 \begin_layout Subsection
33594 Printing the Nomenclature
33595 \begin_inset Index idx
33598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33599 Nomenclature ! Printing
33607 \begin_layout Standard
33608 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
33610 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33611 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33627 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
33628 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
33629 You can choose between these settings:
33632 \begin_layout Description
33633 Default a space of 1
33634 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33640 \begin_layout Description
33642 \begin_inset space ~
33646 \begin_inset space ~
33649 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
33652 \begin_layout Description
33653 Custom custom space
33656 \begin_layout Standard
33657 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
33658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33666 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
33674 For example, in order to change the name to
33678 , add the following line to the preamble:
33681 \begin_layout Standard
33694 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
33697 \begin_layout Standard
33698 When you are using another document language than English, replace
33699 \begin_inset Newline newline
33714 , where *** is the name of the language used.
33717 \begin_layout Subsection
33718 Nomenclature Program
33719 \begin_inset Index idx
33722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33723 Nomenclature ! Program
33729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33731 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
33738 \begin_layout Standard
33744 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33745 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
33747 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
33752 by adding options, see section
33753 \begin_inset space ~
33757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33759 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33764 The available options are listed and explained in
33765 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33767 key "nomencl,makeindex"
33775 \begin_layout Section
33777 \begin_inset Index idx
33780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33787 \begin_inset Index idx
33790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33791 Document ! Branches
33797 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33799 name "sec:Branches"
33806 \begin_layout Standard
33807 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
33808 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
33809 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
33810 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
33813 \begin_layout Standard
33814 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
33815 allows you to put text into branches.
33816 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
33817 To create a branch, either select the menu
33819 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33820 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
33823 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
33825 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33832 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
33833 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
33834 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
33835 and whether the name of the branch should
33836 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
33837 (see below for an example).
33838 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
33839 to the name of the other) and to add
33840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33848 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33852 \begin_inset space ~
33855 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
33856 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
33859 \begin_layout Standard
33860 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
33861 These boxes are inserted via the menu
33863 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33866 where you can choose a branch.
33867 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
33871 \begin_layout Standard
33872 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
33873 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
33876 \begin_layout Standard
33877 \begin_inset Branch Question
33881 \begin_layout Standard
33886 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
33894 \begin_layout Standard
33895 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33899 \begin_layout Standard
33904 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
33912 \begin_layout Standard
33919 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33920 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33923 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
33924 Consider for example a file
33925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33932 which has the above branches.
33934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33941 is active, the PDF export file would be called
33942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33965 branch were inactive,
33966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33981 branch was active, likewise
33982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33997 branch was active, and
33998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34001 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
34002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34005 if both branches were active.
34006 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
34007 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34013 \begin_layout Standard
34014 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
34020 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
34021 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
34025 \begin_inset space ~
34033 \begin_layout Standard
34034 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34038 \begin_layout Standard
34044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34051 branch is deactivated.
34057 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34063 \begin_layout Standard
34064 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
34065 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
34066 definitions for each branch.
34067 For example you can define for the question branch
34071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34072 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34073 -syntax, see section
34074 \begin_inset space ~
34078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34080 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34092 \begin_layout Standard
34102 \begin_layout Standard
34112 \begin_layout Standard
34113 and for the answer branch
34116 \begin_layout Standard
34126 \begin_layout Standard
34136 \begin_layout Standard
34137 \begin_inset Branch Question
34141 \begin_layout Standard
34145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34173 \begin_layout Standard
34174 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34178 \begin_layout Standard
34182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34210 \begin_layout Standard
34211 Now it is possible to use the
34215 question{\SpecialChar ldots
34222 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
34225 commands to obtain conditional output.
34226 Here is an example formula where only the
34233 \begin_inset Formula
34235 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
34243 \begin_layout Standard
34244 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
34252 \begin_layout Standard
34253 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
34255 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34259 \begin_inset space \space{}
34262 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
34264 For this advanced usage, see the
34270 Flex insets and InsetLayout
34275 \begin_layout Section
34277 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34279 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
34284 \begin_inset Index idx
34287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34296 \begin_layout Standard
34299 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34300 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34303 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
34305 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34311 \begin_inset Index idx
34314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34316 packages ! hyperref
34321 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
34322 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
34323 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
34324 part of the document.
34328 \begin_layout Standard
34329 The header information in the dialog tab
34333 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
34334 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
34335 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
34336 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
34340 \begin_inset space ~
34344 \begin_inset space ~
34349 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
34350 tries to extract the header information from your document title
34351 and author entries.
34355 \begin_inset space ~
34359 \begin_inset space ~
34363 \begin_inset space ~
34368 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
34371 \begin_layout Standard
34372 You can specify in the dialog tab
34376 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
34381 \begin_inset space ~
34385 \begin_inset space ~
34389 \begin_inset space ~
34394 option allows long links to be split;
34397 \begin_inset space ~
34401 \begin_inset space ~
34405 \begin_inset space ~
34413 \begin_inset space ~
34418 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
34421 \begin_inset space ~
34426 colors the different links.
34427 The default colors are:
34430 \begin_layout Labeling
34431 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34436 for hyperlinks and URLs
34439 \begin_layout Labeling
34440 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34448 \begin_layout Labeling
34449 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34457 \begin_layout Standard
34458 but you can change these in the field
34463 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
34466 \begin_layout Standard
34469 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
34472 \begin_layout Standard
34477 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
34478 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
34479 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
34482 \begin_layout Standard
34487 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
34488 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
34489 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
34499 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
34500 when opening the PDF.
34502 \begin_inset space ~
34505 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
34506 \begin_inset space ~
34509 1 will only display the sections.
34512 \begin_layout Standard
34513 PDF properties are also used in this document.
34514 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
34520 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
34521 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34531 \begin_layout Section
34533 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34535 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34537 name "sec:TeX-Code"
34544 \begin_layout Subsection
34547 \begin_inset Index idx
34550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34558 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34560 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
34567 \begin_layout Standard
34568 As \SpecialChar LyX
34569 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
34570 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
34571 commands and constructs,
34574 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
34575 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
34576 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
34577 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34578 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
34579 cannot support all packages and
34583 \begin_layout Standard
34584 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
34585 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
34586 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
34590 Code box is created by the menu
34592 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34594 \begin_inset space ~
34599 or by the toolbar button
34612 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
34620 \begin_layout Standard
34621 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
34623 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
34625 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
34629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34630 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
34635 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34642 , you can write the command part
34648 in a \SpecialChar TeX
34649 Code box before the word and the closing brace
34653 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
34654 Code box behind the word.
34655 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
34656 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
34660 \begin_layout Standard
34661 \begin_inset Graphics
34662 filename clipart/ERT.png
34670 \begin_layout Standard
34674 \begin_layout Standard
34675 This is a line with a
34679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34702 \begin_layout Standard
34703 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34711 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34712 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
34713 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
34714 know that the command is finished.
34722 \begin_layout Subsection
34723 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34725 \begin_inset Argument 1
34728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34729 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34736 \begin_inset Index idx
34739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34747 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34749 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34756 \begin_layout Standard
34757 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
34758 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34759 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
34760 uses in the background.
34761 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
34762 is based on commands, you can
34763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34771 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
34772 any time if you know the right commands.
34773 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
34774 is the end of the day.
34775 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
34776 all caption labels bold.
34777 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
34779 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
34783 \begin_layout Standard
34784 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
34786 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34788 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34791 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34801 \begin_layout Standard
34802 As result you find that the package
34807 \begin_inset Index idx
34810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34818 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
34820 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34823 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34827 \begin_inset space ~
34835 \begin_layout Standard
34840 usepackage[options]{package name}
34843 \begin_layout Standard
34844 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
34845 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
34846 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
34847 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
34850 \begin_layout Standard
34851 In your case the package name is
34856 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
34861 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
34862 So you add the command
34865 \begin_layout Standard
34870 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
34873 \begin_layout Standard
34874 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
34878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34879 For more commands provided by the
34883 package, have a look at its documentation,
34884 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34899 \begin_layout Standard
34900 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
34902 For example if you use a
34906 class, you don't need the package
34910 , you can instead write
34913 \begin_layout Standard
34918 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
34923 \begin_layout Standard
34924 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
34925 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
34926 documentation of the document class you want to use.
34933 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
34936 \begin_layout Standard
34937 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
34938 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
34940 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34941 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
34942 Code box as described in the previous
34946 \begin_layout Standard
34947 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
34948 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34951 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34953 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
34961 \begin_layout Standard
34962 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34968 \begin_layout Standard
34972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34982 \begin_inset Note Note
34985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34986 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
34994 \begin_layout Left Header
34995 \begin_inset Argument 1
34998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35018 \begin_inset Note Note
35021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35022 defines the header line as described below
35030 \begin_layout Center Header
35031 \begin_inset Argument 1
35034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35043 \begin_layout Right Header
35044 \begin_inset Argument 1
35047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35068 \begin_layout Left Footer
35069 \begin_inset Argument 1
35072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35093 \begin_layout Center Footer
35094 \begin_inset Argument 1
35097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35109 \begin_inset Newline newline
35113 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35119 \begin_layout Right Footer
35120 \begin_inset Argument 1
35123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35145 \begin_layout Section
35146 Customized Page Headers and Footers
35147 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35149 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
35154 \begin_inset Index idx
35157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35158 Document ! Header/Footer line
35164 \begin_inset Index idx
35167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35176 \begin_layout Standard
35177 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
35181 \begin_inset space ~
35192 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35198 \begin_inset space ~
35204 As a second step add in the menu
35206 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35207 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35216 Custom Header/Footerlines
35219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35223 This module offers the following 6
35224 \begin_inset space ~
35230 \begin_layout Description
35232 \begin_inset space ~
35236 \begin_inset space ~
35240 \begin_inset space ~
35244 \begin_inset space ~
35248 \begin_inset space ~
35254 \begin_layout Description
35256 \begin_inset space ~
35260 \begin_inset space ~
35264 \begin_inset space ~
35268 \begin_inset space ~
35272 \begin_inset space ~
35278 \begin_layout Standard
35279 for the different positions in the header/footer.
35280 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
35283 \begin_layout Standard
35284 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
35285 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
35287 \begin_inset space ~
35291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35293 reference "fig:Page-layout"
35297 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
35300 \begin_layout Standard
35301 \begin_inset Float figure
35308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35311 \begin_inset Tabular
35312 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
35313 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
35314 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35315 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35316 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35318 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
35330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35336 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35347 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35365 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35376 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
35379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35380 The normal text on the page goes here.
35381 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
35383 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
35384 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
35389 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35398 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35409 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35427 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35438 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
35450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35456 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35474 \begin_inset Caption Standard
35476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35479 name "fig:Page-layout"
35483 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
35496 \begin_layout Standard
35497 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35505 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
35509 \begin_inset space ~
35514 is set to “Default”.
35515 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
35524 \begin_layout Subsection
35528 \begin_layout Standard
35529 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
35530 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
35531 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
35532 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
35534 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
35536 Defining the footer line works similarly.
35539 \begin_layout Standard
35540 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
35541 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
35545 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35547 \begin_inset space ~
35555 \begin_layout Description
35558 thepage prints the current page number
35561 \begin_layout Description
35564 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
35567 \begin_layout Description
35570 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
35573 \begin_layout Description
35576 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
35577 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
35580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35584 \begin_inset Quotes prd
35587 because it usually goes in a left header.
35590 \begin_layout Description
35593 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
35594 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
35596 It is normally used in the right header.
35599 \begin_layout Subsection
35600 Default header/footer
35603 \begin_layout Standard
35604 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
35605 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
35606 footer has the page number.
35607 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
35608 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
35609 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
35612 \begin_inset space ~
35620 \begin_layout Subsection
35624 \begin_layout Standard
35625 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
35626 Some pages are different.
35627 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
35628 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
35629 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
35630 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
35631 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
35634 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35635 Header and footer decoration line
35638 \begin_layout Standard
35639 By default, you get a 0.4
35640 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35643 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
35644 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
35656 in the following way:
35659 \begin_layout Standard
35666 headrulewidth}{thickness}
35669 \begin_layout Standard
35670 where thickness is a size in standard units like
35683 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
35684 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35690 \begin_layout Standard
35691 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35693 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
35694 \begin_inset space ~
35698 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35708 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35709 Several header/footer lines
35712 \begin_layout Standard
35713 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
35714 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
35715 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
35717 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35732 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35733 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35735 \begin_inset space ~
35743 \begin_layout Standard
35750 headheight}{height}
35753 \begin_layout Standard
35758 is a size in standard units (e.
35759 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35763 \begin_inset space \space{}
35771 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
35772 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
35773 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35774 logfile with the menu
35776 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35778 \begin_inset space ~
35786 \begin_inset space ~
35791 to see if you can find a warning about the package
35796 \begin_inset Index idx
35799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35801 packages ! fancyhdr
35807 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
35808 for your header/footer.
35811 \begin_layout Subsection
35815 \begin_layout Standard
35816 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
35817 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
35818 This example consists of the following definition:
35821 \begin_layout Description
35823 \begin_inset space ~
35832 , empty optional argument
35835 \begin_layout Description
35837 \begin_inset space ~
35840 Header empty, empty optional argument
35843 \begin_layout Description
35845 \begin_inset space ~
35854 in the optional argument
35857 \begin_layout Description
35859 \begin_inset space ~
35868 in the optional argument
35871 \begin_layout Description
35873 \begin_inset space ~
35886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35890 \begin_inset Newline newline
35894 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35901 in the optional argument
35904 \begin_layout Description
35906 \begin_inset space ~
35915 , empty optional argument
35918 \begin_layout Description
35921 headrulewidth set to 2
35922 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35928 \begin_layout Standard
35929 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
35930 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
35936 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35946 \begin_layout Standard
35947 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35953 \begin_layout Standard
35957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35961 pagestyle{headings}
35967 \begin_inset Note Note
35970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35971 switches back to page style with the default headings
35979 \begin_layout Section
35980 Previewing Snippets of your Document
35981 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35983 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35988 \begin_inset Index idx
35991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35998 \begin_inset Index idx
36001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36010 \begin_layout Standard
36012 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
36013 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
36014 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
36017 \begin_layout Subsection
36021 \begin_layout Standard
36022 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36028 \begin_inset Index idx
36031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36033 packages ! preview-latex
36038 (on some systems named simply
36043 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36045 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36052 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36054 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
36062 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
36063 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36064 -package are automatically
36065 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
36069 \begin_layout Subsection
36073 \begin_layout Standard
36074 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36075 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36077 activate the option
36080 \begin_inset space ~
36087 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36093 \begin_inset space ~
36097 \begin_inset space ~
36100 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
36107 \begin_inset space ~
36120 \begin_inset space ~
36125 is the multiplication factor for the size.
36128 \begin_layout Standard
36129 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36134 \begin_inset space ~
36142 \begin_inset space ~
36150 \begin_layout Standard
36151 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
36152 and when you finish
36156 \begin_layout Standard
36157 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36165 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
36166 generated by activating the option
36169 \begin_inset space ~
36175 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
36183 \begin_layout Subsection
36184 Selected document parts
36187 \begin_layout Standard
36188 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
36189 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
36190 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
36191 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36193 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
36195 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36199 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
36200 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
36201 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
36204 \begin_layout Standard
36205 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36212 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36224 is explained in section
36226 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
36231 \begin_inset space ~
36241 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
36242 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36243 the final rotated boxes,
36244 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
36245 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
36247 Here is the result:
36250 \begin_layout Standard
36251 \begin_inset Preview
36253 \begin_layout Standard
36258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36262 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
36268 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
36278 height_special "totalheight"
36283 backgroundcolor "none"
36286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36311 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
36317 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
36324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36339 \begin_layout Standard
36340 Previewing works also for colors.
36341 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36360 is explained in section
36367 \begin_inset space ~
36380 \begin_layout Standard
36381 \begin_inset Preview
36383 \begin_layout Standard
36387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36406 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
36411 This is text within a colored, framed box.
36415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36430 \begin_layout Standard
36431 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
36437 \begin_layout Standard
36438 If \SpecialChar LyX
36439 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
36440 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
36441 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
36442 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36443 packages in your document preamble that are required by
36444 the \SpecialChar TeX
36446 If \SpecialChar LyX
36447 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
36448 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
36450 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
36451 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
36452 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
36455 \begin_layout Subsection
36460 \begin_layout Standard
36461 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36462 source of the whole document or parts of it.
36465 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
36467 \begin_inset space ~
36472 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36474 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
36476 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
36477 's main window, then only this selection
36478 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
36479 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
36480 the source view window.
36485 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
36486 ; but note that if you have
36487 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
36489 not just the one which is open at the time.
36492 \begin_layout Section
36493 Advanced Find and Replace
36494 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36496 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
36501 \begin_inset Index idx
36504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36511 \begin_inset Index idx
36514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36523 \begin_layout Subsection
36527 \begin_layout Standard
36528 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
36529 allows for searching of complex,
36530 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
36532 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
36533 The key-features are:
36536 \begin_layout Itemize
36537 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
36538 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
36539 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
36543 \begin_layout Itemize
36544 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
36545 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
36546 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
36547 a section heading will only be found within section headings
36550 \begin_layout Itemize
36551 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
36552 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
36553 outside of mathematics environments
36556 \begin_layout Itemize
36557 Search may be widened to a specific
36562 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36566 \begin_inset space ~
36569 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
36570 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
36577 \begin_layout Itemize
36578 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
36579 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
36580 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36584 \begin_inset space ~
36587 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
36590 \begin_layout Subsection
36594 \begin_layout Standard
36595 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
36597 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36610 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
36613 ) or the toolbar button
36616 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
36622 Advanced Find and Replace
36627 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36631 \begin_layout Standard
36637 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
36641 \begin_inset space ~
36646 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
36649 arg "paragraph-break"
36653 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
36654 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
36658 arg "paragraph-break"
36661 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
36665 searches backwards.
36668 \begin_layout Standard
36672 \begin_inset space ~
36677 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
36686 \begin_inset space ~
36691 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
36694 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36695 Searching for mathematics
36698 \begin_layout Standard
36699 Mathematical formulas, such as
36700 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
36703 or something more complex like
36704 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
36707 , may be searched for by typing them in the
36712 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
36713 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
36714 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
36715 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
36721 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36725 \begin_layout Standard
36726 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
36727 This is done by switching to the
36731 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
36736 This way, entering in the
36743 \begin_layout Itemize
36744 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
36745 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
36748 \begin_layout Itemize
36749 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
36750 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
36753 \begin_layout Itemize
36754 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
36755 of it only within section headings.
36756 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
36757 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
36761 \begin_layout Itemize
36762 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
36763 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
36766 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36770 \begin_layout Standard
36771 The entries made in the
36775 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
36778 \begin_inset space ~
36784 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
36788 button or alternatively press
36791 arg "paragraph-break"
36798 while the cursor is in the
36801 \begin_inset space ~
36809 \begin_layout Standard
36810 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
36812 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
36816 \begin_layout Itemize
36817 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
36818 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
36819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36826 with its typewriter version
36827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36841 \begin_layout Itemize
36842 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
36844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36848 \begin_inset Formula $R$
36852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36860 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
36864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36867 (you may want to enable the
36870 \begin_inset space ~
36878 \begin_inset space ~
36883 options and disable the
36891 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
36892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36899 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
36900 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
36904 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
36907 , or occurrences of
36908 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
36912 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
36918 \begin_layout Subsection
36922 \begin_layout Standard
36923 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
36927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36928 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
36930 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36932 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
36942 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
36948 This is done with the context menu
36950 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36951 Insert Regular Expression
36953 while the cursor is in the
36958 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
36959 expression matching rules
36963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36964 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
36967 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36971 \begin_inset space ~
36974 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
36975 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
36981 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
36982 same text in the document.
36983 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
36984 Examples of using such a feature may be:
36987 \begin_layout Enumerate
36988 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
36993 editor the fraction
36994 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
36998 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37001 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
37002 fractions with the given denominator.
37005 \begin_layout Enumerate
37006 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
37018 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37023 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
37024 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
37025 Also, by inserting a
37026 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37029 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
37030 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
37033 \begin_layout Standard
37034 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
37035 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
37036 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37039 , and referring back to them through
37040 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37044 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
37048 For example, try searching with the regexp
37049 \begin_inset Newline newline
37052 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
37055 \begin_inset Newline newline
37058 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
37061 \begin_layout Standard
37062 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
37065 \begin_layout Standard
37066 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37074 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
37075 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
37076 sub-expressions is absolute.
37078 \begin_inset space ~
37082 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37085 always refers to the first occurrence of
37086 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37089 in all entered regexps.
37097 \begin_layout Section
37099 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37101 name "sec:Spellchecking"
37106 \begin_inset Index idx
37109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37118 \begin_layout Standard
37120 has a built-in spell checker.
37123 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37130 key or the toolbar button
37133 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37136 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
37137 beginning of the currently selected text.
37138 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
37139 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
37140 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
37141 scrolled so that it is visible.
37142 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
37143 n, if any could be found.
37144 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
37148 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
37149 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
37152 \begin_layout Standard
37153 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
37156 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37160 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
37161 a different one at the top of the dialog.
37163 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
37164 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
37167 \begin_inset space ~
37175 arg "dialog-show character"
37178 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
37180 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
37183 \begin_layout Standard
37184 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37185 can be downloaded from here:
37186 \begin_inset Newline newline
37190 \begin_inset Flex URL
37193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37195 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
37201 \begin_inset Newline newline
37205 \begin_inset space ~
37208 files for each language.
37209 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
37210 \begin_inset space ~
37213 files into \SpecialChar LyX
37214 's installation subfolder
37222 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37224 \begin_inset Newline newline
37227 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
37228 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
37229 but in most cases these are
37245 is the language code.
37248 \begin_layout Subsection
37252 \begin_layout Standard
37255 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37256 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37258 \begin_inset space ~
37261 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37264 you can set the following things:
37267 \begin_layout Description
37269 \begin_inset space ~
37272 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
37273 should use for spell checking.
37274 Depending on your platform,
37284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37285 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
37286 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
37301 \begin_inset space ~
37304 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
37307 \begin_layout Description
37309 \begin_inset space ~
37312 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
37313 will always use the given language
37314 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
37317 \begin_layout Description
37319 \begin_inset space ~
37322 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
37324 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37328 \begin_inset space \space{}
37332 This should normally not be needed.
37335 \begin_layout Description
37337 \begin_inset space ~
37341 \begin_inset space ~
37344 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
37346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37356 \begin_layout Description
37358 \begin_inset space ~
37361 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
37362 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
37363 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
37364 appear in a context menu.
37365 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
37369 \begin_layout Description
37371 \begin_inset space ~
37375 \begin_inset space ~
37379 \begin_inset space ~
37382 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
37386 \begin_layout Section
37388 \begin_inset Index idx
37391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37398 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37400 name "sec:Thesaurus"
37407 \begin_layout Standard
37409 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
37410 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
37419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37420 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37422 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
37432 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
37434 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
37435 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
37436 which are available for many languages.
37439 \begin_layout Standard
37440 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
37441 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
37445 \begin_layout Subsection
37446 Setting up the thesaurus
37449 \begin_layout Standard
37458 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
37462 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
37467 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
37469 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37473 \begin_inset space ~
37481 For instance, the US English files are named:
37484 \begin_layout Itemize
37488 \begin_layout Itemize
37492 \begin_layout Standard
37501 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
37502 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
37505 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37506 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37507 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37509 \begin_inset space ~
37514 ) to the path where they are installed.
37518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37519 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
37520 ies, typical locations are
37526 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
37530 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
37534 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
37537 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
37543 LibreOffice-<Version>
37550 On the Mac, the default location is
37552 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
37553 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37554 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
37555 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
37556 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37557 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37565 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
37566 during the \SpecialChar LyX
37567 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
37571 \begin_layout Standard
37572 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
37573 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
37575 \begin_inset Newline newline
37579 \begin_inset Flex URL
37582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37584 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
37592 \begin_layout Standard
37593 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
37594 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
37596 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37597 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37598 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37600 \begin_inset space ~
37605 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37607 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
37608 and point \SpecialChar LyX
37612 \begin_layout Standard
37613 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
37615 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37618 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
37624 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
37627 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
37628 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
37630 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37636 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37637 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37638 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37640 \begin_inset space ~
37645 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
37648 \begin_layout Subsection
37649 Using the thesaurus
37652 \begin_layout Standard
37653 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
37655 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37658 or the toolbar button
37661 arg "thesaurus-entry"
37664 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
37666 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
37668 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
37669 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
37670 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
37679 ), related terms (such as
37682 \begin_inset space ~
37691 ), compounds (such as
37694 \begin_inset space ~
37703 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
37712 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
37715 \begin_layout Standard
37716 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
37717 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
37721 \begin_layout Standard
37722 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
37723 the dictionary, such as the above
37727 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
37728 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37732 \begin_inset space \space{}
37735 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
37736 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
37737 For example, looking up the word form
37741 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
37746 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
37747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37751 \begin_inset space \space{}
37762 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
37763 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
37764 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
37767 \begin_layout Section
37769 \begin_inset Index idx
37772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37779 \begin_inset Index idx
37782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37783 Document ! Change Tracking
37789 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37791 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
37798 \begin_layout Standard
37799 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
37800 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
37801 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
37802 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
37804 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37806 \begin_inset space ~
37809 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37811 \begin_inset space ~
37819 \begin_layout Standard
37820 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
37834 The color depends on the author that made the change.
37835 You can change the color in
37837 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37838 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37840 \begin_inset space ~
37844 \begin_inset space ~
37849 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37855 \begin_inset Index idx
37858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37859 Color ! Change tracking
37864 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
37865 's status bar when the
37866 cursor is in changed text.
37867 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
37870 arg "changes-merge"
37876 \begin_layout Standard
37877 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
37879 \begin_inset Index idx
37882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37891 \begin_layout Standard
37892 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37898 \begin_layout Standard
37899 \begin_inset Graphics
37900 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
37908 \begin_layout Standard
37909 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37915 \begin_layout Standard
37916 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
37919 \begin_layout Standard
37920 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37926 \begin_layout Standard
37927 \begin_inset Tabular
37928 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
37929 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37930 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37931 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37932 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37941 arg "changes-track"
37949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37955 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37957 \begin_inset space ~
37960 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37962 \begin_inset space ~
37971 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37980 arg "changes-output"
37988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37994 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37996 \begin_inset space ~
37999 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38001 \begin_inset space ~
38005 \begin_inset space ~
38009 \begin_inset space ~
38018 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38039 Jumps to the next change
38045 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38054 arg "change-accept"
38062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38068 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38070 \begin_inset space ~
38073 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38075 \begin_inset space ~
38084 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38093 arg "change-reject"
38101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38107 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38109 \begin_inset space ~
38112 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38114 \begin_inset space ~
38123 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38132 arg "changes-merge"
38140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38146 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38148 \begin_inset space ~
38151 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38153 \begin_inset space ~
38162 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38171 arg "all-changes-accept"
38179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38185 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38187 \begin_inset space ~
38190 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38192 \begin_inset space ~
38196 \begin_inset space ~
38205 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38214 arg "all-changes-reject"
38222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38228 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38230 \begin_inset space ~
38233 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38235 \begin_inset space ~
38239 \begin_inset space ~
38248 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38271 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38272 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
38274 \begin_inset space ~
38283 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38306 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38308 \begin_inset space ~
38324 \begin_layout Standard
38325 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38331 \begin_layout Standard
38332 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
38352 \begin_layout Standard
38353 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
38354 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
38355 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
38356 the next change after the current cursor position.
38357 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
38358 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
38359 step to the next change.
38360 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
38363 \begin_layout Standard
38364 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
38365 to describe a change.
38368 \begin_layout Standard
38370 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
38371 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38377 \begin_inset Index idx
38380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38388 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
38390 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38397 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38403 \begin_layout Section
38404 Comparison of Documents
38405 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38407 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38412 \begin_inset Index idx
38415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38416 Comparison of documents
38424 \begin_layout Standard
38425 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
38428 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38432 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
38433 file with change tracking enabled showing the
38435 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
38437 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
38441 \begin_inset space ~
38445 \begin_inset space ~
38449 \begin_inset space ~
38458 \begin_inset space ~
38462 \begin_inset space ~
38466 \begin_inset space ~
38470 \begin_inset space ~
38474 \begin_inset space ~
38478 \begin_inset space ~
38483 enables the change tracking option
38486 \begin_inset space ~
38490 \begin_inset space ~
38494 \begin_inset space ~
38499 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
38502 \begin_layout Section
38503 International Support
38504 \begin_inset Index idx
38507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38508 International support
38516 \begin_layout Standard
38517 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
38518 with any language you want.
38519 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
38520 up \SpecialChar LyX
38522 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38524 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
38532 \begin_layout Standard
38533 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
38534 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
38535 \begin_inset space ~
38539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38541 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
38548 \begin_layout Subsection
38550 \begin_inset Index idx
38553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38560 \begin_inset Index idx
38563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38564 Document ! Settings
38570 \begin_inset Index idx
38573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38574 Document ! Language
38582 \begin_layout Standard
38585 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38586 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38589 dialog lets you set
38591 the language, the quote style and character encoding
38596 \begin_layout Standard
38601 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38606 \begin_inset space ~
38611 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
38612 For details about the different encoding options see section
38613 \begin_inset space ~
38617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38619 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
38626 \begin_layout Subsection
38627 Keyboard mapping configuration
38628 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38630 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
38637 \begin_layout Standard
38638 If you have for example a U.
38639 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38642 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
38643 can use an alternate keymap.
38644 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
38649 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38650 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38651 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
38654 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
38655 \begin_inset space ~
38659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38661 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
38666 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
38667 which one you want to use.
38670 \begin_layout Standard
38671 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
38672 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
38673 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
38674 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38677 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
38678 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
38679 one to support the characters you want.
38680 This and many other customizations are explained in the
38687 \begin_layout Chapter
38690 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38692 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
38699 \begin_layout Standard
38700 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
38701 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
38702 topic inside the user's guide.
38705 \begin_layout Section
38707 \begin_inset Index idx
38710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38719 \begin_layout Standard
38724 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
38727 \begin_layout Subsection
38731 \begin_layout Standard
38732 Creates a new document.
38735 \begin_layout Subsection
38739 \begin_layout Standard
38740 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
38741 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
38742 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
38744 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
38745 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
38751 \begin_layout Subsection
38755 \begin_layout Standard
38759 \begin_layout Subsection
38763 \begin_layout Standard
38764 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
38765 Click there on a file to open it.
38768 \begin_layout Subsection
38770 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
38774 \begin_layout Standard
38776 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
38777 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
38781 \begin_layout Subsection
38785 \begin_layout Standard
38786 Closes the current document.
38789 \begin_layout Subsection
38793 \begin_layout Standard
38794 Closes all opened documents.
38797 \begin_layout Subsection
38801 \begin_layout Standard
38802 Saves the actual document.
38805 \begin_layout Subsection
38809 \begin_layout Standard
38810 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
38811 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
38815 \begin_layout Subsection
38817 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
38821 \begin_layout Standard
38823 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
38824 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
38830 \begin_layout Subsection
38834 \begin_layout Standard
38835 Saves all opened documents.
38838 \begin_layout Subsection
38842 \begin_layout Standard
38843 Reloads the actual document from disk.
38846 \begin_layout Subsection
38850 \begin_layout Standard
38851 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
38852 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
38853 It is described in the section
38855 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
38860 Additional Features
38865 \begin_layout Subsection
38869 \begin_layout Standard
38870 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
38871 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
38873 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
38874 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
38878 \begin_layout Standard
38879 When using the menu entry
38882 \begin_inset space ~
38887 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
38891 \begin_inset space ~
38895 \begin_inset space ~
38899 \begin_inset space ~
38904 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
38905 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
38908 \begin_layout Subsection
38910 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38912 name "subsec:Export"
38919 \begin_layout Standard
38920 You can export your document to various file formats.
38921 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
38923 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
38924 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
38925 during its configuration.
38928 \begin_layout Standard
38929 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
38931 \begin_inset space ~
38935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38937 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
38944 \begin_layout Description
38950 \begin_inset space ~
38953 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
38955 \begin_inset space ~
38958 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
38959 \begin_inset Newline newline
38962 Since \SpecialChar LyX
38963 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
38967 \begin_layout Description
38968 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
38974 \begin_layout Description
38976 \begin_inset space ~
38979 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
38985 \begin_layout Description
38986 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
38987 's native DVI-format.
38988 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
38989 files paths or file names in your document.
38991 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
38998 \begin_layout Description
38999 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
39000 in files paths or file names
39003 \begin_layout Description
39005 \begin_inset space ~
39012 ) DVI-format using the program
39014 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39017 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
39021 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39029 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
39037 \begin_layout Description
39039 \begin_inset space ~
39042 (cropped) the same as
39046 but with cropped page margins.
39049 \begin_layout Description
39051 \begin_inset space ~
39054 Dot text file with code in the programming language
39058 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
39063 \begin_layout Description
39067 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39075 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
39083 \begin_layout Description
39085 \begin_inset space ~
39089 \begin_inset space ~
39092 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
39096 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
39104 \begin_layout Description
39108 \begin_inset space ~
39117 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39118 source that is compilable with the program
39120 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39124 \begin_layout Description
39128 \begin_inset space ~
39133 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39134 source, additionally all images used in the document
39135 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
39139 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
39142 \begin_layout Description
39146 \begin_inset space ~
39151 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39152 source code, additionally all images used in the document
39153 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
39161 \begin_layout Description
39165 \begin_inset space ~
39174 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39175 source that is compilable with the program
39181 \begin_layout Description
39183 \begin_inset space ~
39187 \begin_inset space ~
39194 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39195 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
39201 \begin_layout Description
39203 \begin_inset space ~
39206 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
39207 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
39209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39213 \begin_inset space \space{}
39218 \begin_inset space ~
39222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39237 represent the version number)
39240 \begin_layout Description
39242 \begin_inset space ~
39246 \begin_inset space ~
39249 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
39250 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
39251 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39255 \begin_layout Description
39256 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
39257 's internal XHTML engine
39260 \begin_layout Description
39262 \begin_inset space ~
39266 \begin_inset space ~
39270 \begin_inset space ~
39274 \begin_inset space ~
39277 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
39282 For the conversion the program
39291 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39294 \begin_layout Description
39295 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
39300 \begin_layout Description
39302 \begin_inset space ~
39305 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
39307 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
39310 For the conversion the program
39319 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39322 \begin_layout Description
39324 \begin_inset space ~
39327 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
39328 For the conversion the program
39337 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39340 \begin_layout Description
39342 \begin_inset space ~
39345 (cropped) the same as
39348 \begin_inset space ~
39353 but with cropped page margins
39356 \begin_layout Description
39360 \begin_inset space ~
39365 PDF-format using the program
39369 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39372 \begin_layout Description
39376 \begin_inset space ~
39380 \begin_inset space ~
39388 \begin_inset space ~
39393 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
39394 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39398 \begin_inset space \space{}
39401 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
39405 \begin_layout Description
39409 \begin_inset space ~
39414 PDF-format using the program
39416 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39419 , produces PDF-files directly
39422 \begin_layout Description
39426 \begin_inset space ~
39431 PDF-format using the program
39435 , produces PDF-files directly
39438 \begin_layout Description
39442 \begin_inset space ~
39447 PDF-format using the program
39451 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39454 \begin_layout Description
39458 \begin_inset space ~
39463 PDF-format using the program
39468 , produces PDF-files directly
39471 \begin_layout Description
39475 \begin_inset space ~
39483 \begin_layout Description
39487 \begin_inset space ~
39491 \begin_inset space ~
39496 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
39497 and then exported as text using the program
39502 \begin_layout Description
39507 PostScript format using the program
39515 options see section
39516 \begin_inset space ~
39520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39522 reference "subsec:General-output"
39529 \begin_layout Description
39530 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39531 source and also code in the statistical programming
39545 it is possible to use
39549 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
39553 \begin_layout Standard
39554 If one of the menu entries
39561 \begin_inset space ~
39570 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39572 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39574 \begin_inset space ~
39578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39580 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39585 \begin_inset Index idx
39588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39589 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39598 \begin_layout Subsection
39602 \begin_layout Standard
39603 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
39604 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
39607 \begin_inset space ~
39611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39613 reference "sec:Paths"
39618 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
39627 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
39628 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
39629 's preferences as described in section
39630 \begin_inset space ~
39634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39636 reference "subsec:Converters"
39643 \begin_layout Subsection
39644 New and Close Window
39647 \begin_layout Standard
39648 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
39652 \begin_layout Subsection
39656 \begin_layout Standard
39657 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
39660 \begin_layout Section
39662 \begin_inset Index idx
39665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39674 \begin_layout Subsection
39678 \begin_layout Standard
39679 Described in section
39680 \begin_inset space ~
39684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39686 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
39693 \begin_layout Subsection
39694 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
39697 \begin_layout Standard
39698 Described in section
39699 \begin_inset space ~
39703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39705 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39712 \begin_layout Subsection
39716 \begin_layout Standard
39717 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
39718 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
39721 \begin_layout Subsection
39725 \begin_layout Standard
39726 Selects the whole document.
39729 \begin_layout Subsection
39730 Find & Replace (Quick)
39733 \begin_layout Standard
39734 Described in section
39735 \begin_inset space ~
39739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39741 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39748 \begin_layout Subsection
39749 Find & Replace (Advanced)
39752 \begin_layout Standard
39753 Described in section
39754 \begin_inset space ~
39758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39760 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
39767 \begin_layout Subsection
39768 Move Paragraph Up/Down
39771 \begin_layout Standard
39772 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
39776 \begin_layout Subsection
39778 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39782 \begin_layout Standard
39784 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39785 Described in section
39786 \begin_inset space ~
39790 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39792 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39801 \begin_layout Subsection
39803 \begin_inset Index idx
39806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39807 Paragraph ! Settings
39815 \begin_layout Standard
39816 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
39817 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
39821 \begin_layout Standard
39822 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
39823 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
39829 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39830 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39832 \begin_inset space ~
39838 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
39842 \begin_layout Subsection
39844 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
39848 \begin_layout Standard
39850 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39851 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
39856 \begin_layout Enumerate
39858 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
39859 Customize text properties by means of the
39865 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
39868 ; this is described in section
39869 \begin_inset space ~
39873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39875 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39882 \begin_layout Enumerate
39884 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
39885 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
39887 Apply last settings
39890 \begin_layout Enumerate
39892 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39893 Change the casing of selected text (
39908 \begin_layout Subsection
39910 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
39914 \begin_layout Standard
39916 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
39917 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
39918 text styles (in the case of this document:
39940 \begin_inset space ~
39944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39946 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
39955 \begin_layout Subsection
39956 Table and Rows & Columns
39959 \begin_layout Standard
39960 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
39961 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
39962 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
39965 \begin_layout Subsection
39969 \begin_layout Standard
39970 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
39971 It will dissolve this inset.
39972 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
39976 \begin_layout Subsection
39980 \begin_layout Standard
39981 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
39982 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
39985 \begin_layout Subsection
39986 Increase/Decrease List Depth
39989 \begin_layout Standard
39990 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
39992 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
39993 \begin_inset space ~
39997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39999 reference "sec:Nesting"
40004 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40006 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
40013 \begin_layout Section
40015 \begin_inset Index idx
40018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40027 \begin_layout Standard
40028 At the bottom of the
40032 menu the opened documents are listed.
40035 \begin_layout Subsection
40036 Open/Close all Insets
40039 \begin_layout Standard
40040 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
40043 \begin_layout Subsection
40044 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
40047 \begin_layout Standard
40048 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
40051 \begin_layout Standard
40052 Math macros are described in the
40059 \begin_layout Subsection
40063 \begin_layout Standard
40064 Shows the outline window as described in sections
40065 \begin_inset space ~
40069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40071 reference "sec:Navigating"
40076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40078 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
40085 \begin_layout Subsection
40089 \begin_layout Standard
40090 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
40092 \begin_inset space ~
40096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40098 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
40105 \begin_layout Subsection
40109 \begin_layout Standard
40110 Opens a window showing console messages.
40111 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
40113 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40116 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
40117 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
40118 is processing the document.
40121 \begin_layout Subsection
40123 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40125 name "subsec:Toolbars"
40130 \begin_inset Index idx
40133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40142 \begin_layout Standard
40143 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
40145 All toolbars and the
40148 \begin_inset space ~
40153 can be turned on and off.
40158 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
40170 \begin_inset space ~
40182 \begin_inset space ~
40187 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
40191 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
40198 \begin_layout Standard
40203 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
40207 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
40208 or when a certain feature is enabled.
40209 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
40210 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
40211 is inside a formula or table respectively.
40214 \begin_layout Standard
40216 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
40217 \begin_inset space ~
40221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40223 reference "sec:Toolbars"
40230 \begin_layout Subsection
40234 \begin_layout Standard
40238 \begin_inset space ~
40242 \begin_inset space ~
40246 \begin_inset space ~
40250 \begin_inset space ~
40254 \begin_inset space ~
40258 \begin_inset space ~
40263 will split \SpecialChar LyX
40264 's main window vertically while
40267 \begin_inset space ~
40271 \begin_inset space ~
40275 \begin_inset space ~
40279 \begin_inset space ~
40283 \begin_inset space ~
40287 \begin_inset space ~
40292 will split it horizontally.
40293 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
40294 to view the same document, but at different positions.
40295 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
40296 three or more documents at the same time.
40297 To close a split view, use the menu
40300 \begin_inset space ~
40304 \begin_inset space ~
40312 \begin_layout Subsection
40316 \begin_layout Standard
40317 Closes a split view.
40320 \begin_layout Subsection
40324 \begin_layout Standard
40325 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
40326 so that you will see nothing but your text.
40327 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
40328 's main window fullscreen.
40329 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
40330 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
40333 \begin_layout Section
40335 \begin_inset Index idx
40338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40347 \begin_layout Subsection
40351 \begin_layout Standard
40352 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
40353 \begin_inset space ~
40357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40359 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
40370 \begin_layout Subsection
40372 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40374 name "subsec:Special-Character"
40381 \begin_layout Standard
40382 Here you can insert the following characters:
40385 \begin_layout Description
40390 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
40393 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
40394 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40395 -packages you have installed.
40396 You can get a complete display by checking
40399 \begin_inset space ~
40405 \begin_inset Newline newline
40409 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40417 Not all characters will be visible in the
40421 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
40422 dialog (see section
40423 \begin_inset space ~
40427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40429 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
40433 ) can display every character.
40441 \begin_layout Description
40442 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
40446 \begin_layout Description
40448 \begin_inset space ~
40452 \begin_inset space ~
40455 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
40456 \begin_inset space ~
40460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40462 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
40469 \begin_layout Description
40471 \begin_inset space ~
40474 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
40477 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40478 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40484 \begin_layout Description
40486 \begin_inset space ~
40489 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
40492 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40493 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40499 \begin_layout Description
40501 \begin_inset space ~
40504 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
40508 \begin_layout Description
40510 \begin_inset space ~
40513 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
40517 \begin_layout Description
40519 \begin_inset space ~
40523 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
40524 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing
40530 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40535 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40537 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40541 \begin_inset space \space{}
40544 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40545 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40554 To insert a fraction use the command
40559 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40563 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40572 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40579 \begin_layout Description
40581 \begin_inset space ~
40584 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
40588 \begin_layout Description
40590 \begin_inset space ~
40594 \begin_inset Index idx
40597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40604 \begin_inset Index idx
40607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40608 Language ! Phonetic symbols
40613 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
40614 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
40616 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40622 \begin_inset Index idx
40625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40633 \begin_inset Newline newline
40636 More information about this feature can be found in the
40642 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
40648 \begin_layout Description
40649 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
40651 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
40652 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
40656 \begin_layout Subsection
40660 \begin_layout Standard
40661 Opens a submenu with the following options:
40664 \begin_layout Description
40665 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
40666 \begin_inset script superscript
40668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40677 \begin_layout Description
40678 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
40679 \begin_inset script subscript
40681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40690 \begin_layout Description
40692 \begin_inset space ~
40695 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
40696 \begin_inset space ~
40700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40702 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
40709 \begin_layout Description
40711 \begin_inset space ~
40714 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
40715 \begin_inset space ~
40719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40721 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
40728 \begin_layout Description
40730 \begin_inset space ~
40733 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
40734 \begin_inset space ~
40738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40740 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
40747 \begin_layout Description
40749 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
40751 \begin_inset space ~
40754 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40756 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40760 \begin_inset space \space{}
40763 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40764 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40773 To insert a fraction use the command
40778 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40782 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40791 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40800 \begin_layout Description
40802 \begin_inset space ~
40805 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
40806 \begin_inset space ~
40810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40812 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
40819 \begin_layout Description
40821 \begin_inset space ~
40824 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
40825 \begin_inset space ~
40829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40831 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
40838 \begin_layout Description
40840 \begin_inset space ~
40843 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
40844 \begin_inset space ~
40848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40850 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
40857 \begin_layout Description
40858 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
40859 \begin_inset space ~
40863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40865 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
40872 \begin_layout Description
40874 \begin_inset space ~
40877 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
40878 \begin_inset space ~
40882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40884 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
40891 \begin_layout Description
40893 \begin_inset space ~
40896 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
40897 \begin_inset space ~
40901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40903 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
40910 \begin_layout Description
40912 \begin_inset space ~
40916 \begin_inset space ~
40919 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
40922 \begin_inset space ~
40926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40928 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
40935 for a usage example.
40938 \begin_layout Description
40940 \begin_inset space ~
40944 \begin_inset space ~
40947 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
40948 \begin_inset space ~
40952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40954 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40961 \begin_layout Description
40963 \begin_inset space ~
40966 Break Inserts a forced line break that
40967 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
40970 justifies the remaining text as described in section
40971 \begin_inset space ~
40975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40977 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40984 \begin_layout Description
40986 \begin_inset space ~
40989 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
40990 \begin_inset space ~
40994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40996 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41003 \begin_layout Description
41005 \begin_inset space ~
41008 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
41009 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
41011 \begin_inset space ~
41015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41017 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41024 \begin_layout Description
41026 \begin_inset space ~
41029 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
41030 \begin_inset space ~
41034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41036 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41043 \begin_layout Description
41045 \begin_inset space ~
41049 \begin_inset space ~
41052 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
41053 \begin_inset space ~
41057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41059 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41066 \begin_layout Subsection
41068 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
41072 \begin_layout Standard
41074 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
41075 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
41076 The submenu allows you to insert
41079 \begin_layout Description
41081 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
41083 \begin_inset space ~
41086 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
41089 \begin_layout Description
41091 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
41093 \begin_inset space ~
41097 \begin_inset space ~
41100 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
41104 \begin_layout Description
41106 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
41108 \begin_inset space ~
41111 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
41114 \begin_layout Description
41116 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
41118 \begin_inset space ~
41121 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
41124 \begin_layout Description
41126 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
41128 \begin_inset space ~
41132 \begin_inset space ~
41135 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
41139 \begin_layout Description
41141 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
41143 \begin_inset space ~
41146 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
41149 \begin_layout Description
41151 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
41153 \begin_inset space ~
41157 \begin_inset space ~
41161 \begin_inset space ~
41164 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
41167 \begin_layout Description
41169 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
41171 \begin_inset space ~
41174 Name inserts the user name as specified in
41176 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41177 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41183 \begin_layout Description
41185 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
41187 \begin_inset space ~
41190 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
41192 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41193 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41199 \begin_layout Description
41201 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
41202 Other\SpecialChar ldots
41203 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
41204 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
41207 \begin_layout Subsection
41210 List/Contents/References
41213 \begin_layout Standard
41214 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
41218 \begin_inset space ~
41239 are described in section
41240 \begin_inset space ~
41244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41246 reference "sec:toc"
41255 is described in section
41256 \begin_inset space ~
41260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41262 reference "sec:Index"
41270 is described in section
41271 \begin_inset space ~
41275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41277 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41283 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41286 is described in section
41287 \begin_inset space ~
41291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41293 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
41300 \begin_layout Subsection
41304 \begin_layout Standard
41305 To insert floats, as described in section
41306 \begin_inset space ~
41310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41312 reference "sec:Floats"
41316 and in detail the chapter
41323 \begin_inset space ~
41331 \begin_layout Subsection
41335 \begin_layout Standard
41336 To insert notes, described in section
41337 \begin_inset space ~
41341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41343 reference "sec:Notes"
41350 \begin_layout Subsection
41354 \begin_layout Standard
41355 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
41357 Branches are described in section
41358 \begin_inset space ~
41362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41364 reference "sec:Branches"
41371 \begin_layout Subsection
41375 \begin_layout Standard
41376 Inserts document class-specific insets.
41377 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
41379 An example is the document class
41380 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
41382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41390 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
41394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41399 with three custom insets.
41402 Flex insets and InsetLayout
41406 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
41412 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
41415 \begin_layout Subsection
41417 \begin_inset Index idx
41420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41429 \begin_layout Standard
41430 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
41432 For more information see chapter
41434 External Document Parts
41437 \begin_inset space ~
41443 \begin_layout Subsection
41445 \begin_inset Index idx
41448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41457 \begin_layout Standard
41458 Inserts a box in a certain style.
41459 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
41466 \begin_inset space ~
41474 \begin_layout Subsection
41478 \begin_layout Standard
41483 dialog as described in section
41484 \begin_inset space ~
41488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41490 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41497 \begin_layout Subsection
41501 \begin_layout Standard
41506 as described in section
41507 \begin_inset space ~
41511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41513 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41520 \begin_layout Subsection
41524 \begin_layout Standard
41529 as described in section
41530 \begin_inset space ~
41534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41536 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41543 \begin_layout Subsection
41545 \begin_inset Index idx
41548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41555 \begin_inset Index idx
41558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41559 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
41567 \begin_layout Standard
41568 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
41569 Floats are described in section
41570 \begin_inset space ~
41574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41576 reference "sec:Floats"
41580 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
41583 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
41591 \begin_inset space ~
41599 \begin_layout Subsection
41603 \begin_layout Standard
41604 Inserts an index entry as described in section
41605 \begin_inset space ~
41609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41611 reference "sec:Index"
41618 \begin_layout Subsection
41622 \begin_layout Standard
41623 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
41624 \begin_inset space ~
41628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41630 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41637 \begin_layout Subsection
41641 \begin_layout Standard
41642 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
41643 Tables are described in section
41644 \begin_inset space ~
41648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41650 reference "sec:Tables"
41654 and in detail in the chapter
41661 \begin_inset space ~
41669 \begin_layout Subsection
41673 \begin_layout Standard
41679 Graphics are described in section
41680 \begin_inset space ~
41684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41686 reference "sec:Graphics"
41693 \begin_layout Subsection
41697 \begin_layout Standard
41698 Inserts a URL as described in section
41699 \begin_inset space ~
41703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41705 reference "subsec:URLs"
41712 \begin_layout Subsection
41716 \begin_layout Standard
41717 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
41718 \begin_inset space ~
41722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41724 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
41731 \begin_layout Subsection
41735 \begin_layout Standard
41736 Inserts a footnote as described in section
41737 \begin_inset space ~
41741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41743 reference "sec:Footnotes"
41750 \begin_layout Subsection
41754 \begin_layout Standard
41755 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
41756 \begin_inset space ~
41760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41762 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
41769 \begin_layout Subsection
41772 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
41775 \begin_layout Standard
41776 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
41777 environments of the same type.
41779 \begin_inset space ~
41783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41785 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
41789 for an explanation.
41792 \begin_layout Subsection
41796 \begin_layout Standard
41797 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
41798 title or caption of a float.
41799 Inserts a short title as described in section
41800 \begin_inset space ~
41804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41806 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
41813 \begin_layout Subsection
41818 \begin_layout Standard
41819 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
41820 Code box as described in section
41821 \begin_inset space ~
41825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41827 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
41834 \begin_layout Subsection
41836 \begin_inset Index idx
41839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41848 \begin_layout Standard
41849 Inserts a program listings box.
41850 Program listings are explained in the chapter
41852 Program Code Listings
41857 \begin_inset space ~
41865 \begin_layout Subsection
41867 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41871 \begin_layout Standard
41873 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41874 Inserts the actual date.
41875 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
41882 \begin_layout Subsection
41886 \begin_layout Standard
41887 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
41888 \begin_inset space ~
41892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41894 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41901 \begin_layout Section
41903 \begin_inset Index idx
41906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41915 \begin_layout Standard
41916 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
41917 \begin_inset space ~
41920 of the current document.
41921 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
41924 \begin_layout Subsection
41928 \begin_layout Standard
41929 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
41930 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
41931 to jump, for example, between section
41932 \begin_inset space ~
41936 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
41937 \begin_inset space ~
41940 2.5 and use the submenu
41943 \begin_inset space ~
41947 \begin_inset space ~
41954 \begin_inset space ~
41960 \begin_inset space ~
41964 \begin_inset space ~
41970 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
41974 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
41980 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
41983 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
41986 \begin_layout Standard
41987 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
41991 \begin_inset space ~
41996 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
41999 \begin_inset space ~
42004 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
42007 \begin_layout Subsection
42008 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
42011 \begin_layout Standard
42012 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
42016 \begin_layout Subsection
42020 \begin_layout Standard
42021 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
42022 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
42023 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
42027 \begin_inset space ~
42031 \begin_inset space ~
42039 \begin_layout Subsection
42043 \begin_layout Standard
42044 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
42047 The \SpecialChar LyX
42048 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
42050 \begin_inset space ~
42058 \begin_inset space ~
42063 manual for a detailed description.
42066 \begin_layout Section
42068 \begin_inset Index idx
42071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42080 \begin_layout Subsection
42084 \begin_layout Standard
42085 Change Tracking is described in section
42086 \begin_inset space ~
42090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42092 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42099 \begin_layout Subsection
42107 \begin_layout Standard
42108 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
42109 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
42110 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42112 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
42113 to the clipboard or update the view.
42114 \begin_inset Newline newline
42117 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42121 \begin_layout Standard
42124 Open Containing Directory
42126 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
42127 's temporary folder for the document.
42128 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
42129 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
42130 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
42131 For example some journals require to send the
42135 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
42139 \begin_layout Subsection
42140 Start Appendix Here
42143 \begin_layout Standard
42144 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
42145 as described in section
42146 \begin_inset space ~
42150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42152 reference "sec:Appendices"
42159 \begin_layout Subsection
42161 \begin_inset space ~
42167 \begin_layout Standard
42168 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
42169 default output format for the document (menu
42171 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42172 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42173 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42175 \begin_inset space ~
42179 \begin_inset space ~
42185 \begin_inset space ~
42189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42191 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42195 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
42198 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42199 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42201 \begin_inset space ~
42204 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42206 \begin_inset space ~
42209 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42211 \begin_inset space ~
42215 \begin_inset space ~
42221 \begin_inset space ~
42225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42227 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42231 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
42232 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42234 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42235 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42237 \begin_inset space ~
42240 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42242 \begin_inset space ~
42245 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42249 \begin_inset space ~
42253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42255 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42260 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42261 when it is first configured.
42262 The default output format is
42265 \begin_inset space ~
42273 \begin_layout Subsection
42274 View (Other Formats)
42277 \begin_layout Standard
42278 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
42279 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
42280 actual document with an external program.
42281 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
42282 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42283 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
42285 All possible formats are listed in section
42286 \begin_inset space ~
42290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42292 reference "subsec:Export"
42297 You should at least see the menu entry
42302 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42304 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
42306 \begin_inset space ~
42310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42312 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42317 \begin_inset Index idx
42320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42321 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42330 \begin_layout Standard
42331 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
42332 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42334 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42335 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42337 \begin_inset space ~
42340 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42342 \begin_inset space ~
42345 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42349 \begin_inset space ~
42353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42355 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42360 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42361 when it is first configured.
42364 \begin_layout Subsection
42366 \begin_inset space ~
42372 \begin_layout Standard
42373 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
42374 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
42377 \begin_layout Subsection
42378 Update (Other Formats)
42381 \begin_layout Standard
42382 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
42383 your document without opening a new viewer window.
42386 \begin_layout Subsection
42387 View Master Document
42390 \begin_layout Standard
42391 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42407 \begin_inset space ~
42412 manual for more information on this topic).
42413 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
42414 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
42418 \begin_inset space ~
42422 \begin_inset space ~
42427 generates the output of the whole book, while
42431 will just output the chapter alone.
42434 \begin_layout Standard
42435 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42436 in the document settings (menu
42438 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42439 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42440 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42442 \begin_inset space ~
42446 \begin_inset space ~
42452 \begin_inset space ~
42456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42458 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42462 ) or in the preferences (menu
42464 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42465 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42467 \begin_inset space ~
42470 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42472 \begin_inset space ~
42475 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42477 \begin_inset space ~
42481 \begin_inset space ~
42487 \begin_inset space ~
42491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42493 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42500 \begin_layout Subsection
42501 Update Master Document
42504 \begin_layout Standard
42505 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42521 \begin_inset space ~
42526 manual for more information on this topic).
42527 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
42528 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
42531 \begin_layout Standard
42532 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42533 in the document settings (menu
42535 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42536 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42537 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42539 \begin_inset space ~
42543 \begin_inset space ~
42549 \begin_inset space ~
42553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42555 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42559 ) or in the preferences (menu
42561 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42562 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42564 \begin_inset space ~
42567 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42569 \begin_inset space ~
42572 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42574 \begin_inset space ~
42578 \begin_inset space ~
42584 \begin_inset space ~
42588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42590 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42597 \begin_layout Subsection
42599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42601 name "subsec:Compressed"
42608 \begin_layout Standard
42609 Un/compresses the current document.
42610 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
42611 compression (see the
42613 Additional Features
42615 manual for details).
42618 \begin_layout Subsection
42622 \begin_layout Standard
42623 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
42626 \begin_layout Subsection
42630 \begin_layout Standard
42631 The document settings are described in appendix
42632 \begin_inset space ~
42636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42638 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42645 \begin_layout Section
42647 \begin_inset Index idx
42650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42659 \begin_layout Subsection
42663 \begin_layout Standard
42664 Spell checking is explained in section
42665 \begin_inset space ~
42669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42671 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
42678 \begin_layout Subsection
42682 \begin_layout Standard
42683 The thesaurus is described in section
42684 \begin_inset space ~
42688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42690 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
42697 \begin_layout Subsection
42699 \begin_inset Index idx
42702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42709 \begin_inset Index idx
42712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42721 \begin_layout Standard
42722 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
42723 the highlighted document part.
42726 \begin_layout Subsection
42732 \begin_inset Index idx
42735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42736 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42745 \begin_layout Standard
42746 Generates with the help of the program
42748 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42751 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
42752 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
42753 This feature is not available on Windows.
42756 \begin_layout Subsection
42762 \begin_inset Index idx
42765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42775 \begin_layout Standard
42776 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42781 \begin_inset space ~
42786 to see the full filename paths.
42789 \begin_layout Subsection
42791 \begin_inset Index idx
42794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42803 \begin_layout Standard
42804 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
42805 files as described in section
42806 \begin_inset space ~
42810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42812 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
42819 \begin_layout Subsection
42821 \begin_inset Index idx
42824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42837 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42855 \begin_inset Index idx
42858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42859 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42868 \begin_layout Standard
42869 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
42870 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
42871 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42872 -packages and programs it needs; see
42874 \begin_inset space ~
42878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42880 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42887 \begin_layout Subsection
42891 \begin_layout Standard
42896 dialog as described in detail in appendix
42897 \begin_inset space ~
42901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42903 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42910 \begin_layout Section
42912 \begin_inset Index idx
42915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42924 \begin_layout Standard
42925 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
42926 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
42928 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
42932 \begin_layout Standard
42936 \begin_inset space ~
42941 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
42942 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42943 packages and classes found
42944 by \SpecialChar LyX
42946 \begin_inset space ~
42950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42952 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
42959 \begin_layout Standard
42963 \begin_inset space ~
42968 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
42973 \begin_layout Section
42975 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42977 name "sec:Toolbars"
42984 \begin_layout Standard
42985 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
42986 \begin_inset space ~
42990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42992 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
42999 \begin_layout Standard
43000 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
43001 This is described in the
43003 Additional Features
43008 \begin_layout Subsection
43010 \begin_inset Index idx
43013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43022 \begin_layout Standard
43023 \begin_inset Graphics
43024 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
43032 \begin_layout Standard
43033 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43039 \begin_layout Standard
43040 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43057 \begin_inset Note Note
43060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43061 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
43066 manual for more information.
43074 \begin_layout Standard
43075 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43081 \begin_layout Standard
43082 \begin_inset Tabular
43083 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
43084 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43086 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43092 \begin_inset Graphics
43093 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
43103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43107 pull-down box for the environments
43120 \begin_layout Standard
43121 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
43127 \begin_layout Standard
43129 \begin_inset Tabular
43130 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
43131 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43132 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43133 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43134 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43157 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43164 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43187 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43194 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43217 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43224 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43233 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
43241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43247 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43254 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43263 arg "spelling-continuously"
43271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43275 Spellcheck continuously
43281 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43304 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43311 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43334 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43341 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43364 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43371 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43394 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43401 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43424 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43426 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
43431 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43440 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43449 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
43457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43463 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43465 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43469 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43482 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43489 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
43497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43503 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43505 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43509 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43522 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43531 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
43539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43545 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43546 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
43553 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43574 Emphasize text, function of the
43575 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
43578 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43580 \begin_inset space ~
43583 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43585 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
43591 arg "dialog-show character"
43602 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43623 Set text to noun style, function of the
43624 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
43627 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43629 \begin_inset space ~
43632 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43634 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
43640 arg "dialog-show character"
43651 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43657 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
43660 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
43668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43673 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
43676 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43683 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43689 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
43694 arg "textstyle-apply"
43704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43709 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
43710 Format text using the current settings in the
43712 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43714 \begin_inset space ~
43717 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43728 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43751 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43752 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
43754 \begin_inset space ~
43763 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43772 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
43780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43786 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43793 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43800 arg "tabular-insert"
43808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43814 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43821 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43827 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
43830 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
43838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43843 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
43846 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43853 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43862 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
43870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43874 Toggle outline window on/off,
43876 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43883 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43892 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
43900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43904 Toggle math toolbar on/off
43910 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43919 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
43927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43931 Toggle table toolbar on/off
43944 \begin_layout Subsection
43946 \begin_inset Index idx
43949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43958 \begin_layout Standard
43959 \begin_inset Graphics
43960 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
43968 \begin_layout Standard
43969 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43975 \begin_layout Standard
43976 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43980 \begin_layout Standard
43981 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43987 \begin_layout Standard
43988 \begin_inset Tabular
43989 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
43990 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43991 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43992 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43993 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44020 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44029 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
44037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44047 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44056 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
44064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44074 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44083 arg "layout-toggle List"
44091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44101 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44110 arg "layout-toggle Description"
44118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44128 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44137 arg "depth-increment"
44145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44151 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44153 \begin_inset space ~
44157 \begin_inset space ~
44166 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44175 arg "depth-decrement"
44183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44189 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44191 \begin_inset space ~
44195 \begin_inset space ~
44204 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44213 arg "float-insert figure"
44221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44227 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44228 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44235 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44244 arg "float-insert table"
44252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44258 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44259 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44266 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44289 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44296 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44305 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
44313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44319 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44326 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44335 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
44343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44349 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44356 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44379 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44381 \begin_inset space ~
44390 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44399 arg "nomencl-insert"
44407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44413 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44415 \begin_inset space ~
44424 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44433 arg "footnote-insert"
44441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44447 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44454 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44463 arg "marginalnote-insert"
44471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44477 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44479 \begin_inset space ~
44488 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44511 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44512 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
44514 \begin_inset space ~
44523 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44532 arg "box-insert Frameless"
44540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44546 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44553 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44576 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44583 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44606 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44608 \begin_inset space ~
44617 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44626 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
44634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44640 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44641 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44648 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44657 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
44665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44671 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44672 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44674 \begin_inset space ~
44683 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44692 arg "dialog-show character"
44700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44706 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44708 \begin_inset space ~
44711 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44718 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44724 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
44729 arg "textstyle-apply"
44737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44742 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
44743 Format text using the recent settings in the
44746 arg "dialog-show character"
44755 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44764 arg "layout-paragraph"
44772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44778 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44780 \begin_inset space ~
44789 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44798 arg "thesaurus-entry"
44806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44812 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44826 \begin_layout Subsection
44827 View/Update Toolbar
44828 \begin_inset Index idx
44831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44832 Toolbar ! View / Update
44840 \begin_layout Standard
44841 \begin_inset Graphics
44842 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
44849 \begin_layout Standard
44850 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44856 \begin_layout Standard
44857 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44861 \begin_layout Standard
44862 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44868 \begin_layout Standard
44869 \begin_inset Tabular
44870 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
44871 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44872 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44873 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44874 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44897 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44904 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44913 arg "buffer-update"
44921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44927 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44934 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44943 arg "master-buffer-view"
44951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44957 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44959 \begin_inset space ~
44968 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44977 arg "master-buffer-update"
44985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44991 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44993 \begin_inset space ~
44997 \begin_inset space ~
45006 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45015 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
45023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45029 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45030 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45031 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
45032 Synchronize with Output
45038 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45049 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
45059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45065 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45066 View (Other Formats)
45072 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45079 arg "update-others"
45083 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
45091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45097 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45098 Update (Other Formats)
45111 \begin_layout Standard
45113 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
45114 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
45120 \begin_layout Subsection
45124 \begin_layout Standard
45125 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
45126 \begin_inset space ~
45130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45132 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
45136 , the table toolbar
45137 \begin_inset Index idx
45140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45149 \begin_inset space ~
45154 manual and the math macro toolbar
45155 \begin_inset Index idx
45158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45171 \begin_layout Chapter
45172 The Document Settings
45173 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45175 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
45180 \begin_inset Index idx
45183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45184 Document ! Settings
45192 \begin_layout Standard
45196 \begin_inset space ~
45201 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
45202 is called with the menu
45204 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45208 You can save your document settings as default with the
45210 Save as Document Defaults
45212 button in any dialog.
45213 This will create a template named
45217 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
45218 when you create a new document without
45222 \begin_layout Standard
45227 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
45228 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
45231 \begin_layout Standard
45232 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
45233 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
45234 to find the one you are looking for.
45235 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
45236 the submenus of the dialog.
45238 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45242 \begin_inset space \space{}
45246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45253 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
45254 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
45255 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
45258 \begin_layout Section
45262 \begin_layout Standard
45263 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
45265 Document classes are described in section
45266 \begin_inset space ~
45270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45272 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
45280 \begin_layout Standard
45284 \begin_inset space ~
45289 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
45294 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
45295 as a layout for a document class.
45296 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
45298 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
45307 \begin_layout Standard
45308 Some classes use special class options by default.
45309 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
45313 and you can decide to use them or not.
45314 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
45315 recommended you leave them untouched.
45320 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45321 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
45326 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45328 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
45333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45334 When you want to use one of the following drivers
45335 \begin_inset Newline newline
45340 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
45343 \begin_inset Newline newline
45346 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45347 distribution, see section
45352 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45354 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
45367 \begin_layout Standard
45372 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
45373 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
45374 in the background if the child document
45375 is opened without its master.
45376 This way child documents are always compilable.
45377 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
45384 \begin_inset space ~
45392 \begin_layout Standard
45393 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45404 \begin_inset Index idx
45407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45409 packages ! prettyref
45415 \begin_inset Index idx
45418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45420 packages ! refstyle
45425 for cross-references, see section
45426 \begin_inset space ~
45430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45432 reference "sec:Cross-References"
45439 \begin_layout Section
45443 \begin_layout Standard
45444 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
45445 Please refer to the section
45448 \begin_inset space ~
45456 \begin_inset space ~
45461 manual for details.
45464 \begin_layout Section
45468 \begin_layout Standard
45469 Modules are explained in section
45470 \begin_inset space ~
45474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45476 reference "subsec:Modules"
45483 \begin_layout Section
45487 \begin_layout Standard
45489 \begin_inset space ~
45493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45495 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
45502 \begin_layout Section
45506 \begin_layout Standard
45507 The document font settings are described in section
45508 \begin_inset space ~
45512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45514 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
45521 \begin_layout Section
45525 \begin_layout Standard
45526 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
45538 \begin_inset space ~
45543 and whether it should be a
45546 \begin_inset space ~
45551 can also be specified here.
45554 \begin_layout Standard
45555 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
45556 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
45557 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
45559 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
45562 \begin_layout Standard
45565 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
45568 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
45569 justifies the text on screen.
45570 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
45572 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
45576 \begin_layout Standard
45578 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
45587 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
45592 \begin_layout Section
45596 \begin_layout Standard
45597 This dialog is described in sections
45598 \begin_inset space ~
45602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45604 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
45609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45611 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
45618 \begin_layout Section
45622 \begin_layout Standard
45623 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
45624 \begin_inset space ~
45628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45630 reference "subsec:Margins"
45637 \begin_layout Section
45639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45641 name "sec:Language-encodings"
45646 \begin_inset Index idx
45649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45650 Language ! Encoding
45658 \begin_layout Standard
45659 The document language and quote styles are set here.
45660 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
45661 (the \SpecialChar LyX
45663 is always encoded in utf8).
45664 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
45665 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
45666 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45667 -command is not known for
45668 a particular character).
45669 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
45673 \begin_layout Standard
45675 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
45676 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
45677 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
45678 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
45679 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
45680 's default encoding).
45681 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
45682 's Unicode support covers the
45683 characters of most scripts.
45684 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
45685 using one of the traditional, or
45686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45693 , encodings is necessary.
45696 \begin_layout Standard
45698 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
45700 provides support for these traditional encodings.
45703 Traditional (auto-selected)
45709 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
45710 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
45711 the given language(s).
45713 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45717 \begin_layout Standard
45719 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45720 If you use the option
45725 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
45728 If the document contains text in more than one language you
45729 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
45732 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45735 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
45736 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
45737 exactly one encoding.
45738 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
45743 \begin_layout Standard
45745 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
45746 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
45752 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
45753 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45757 \begin_layout Standard
45759 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
45760 Finally, you can also select
45764 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
45765 Note that this encoding is then used for
45770 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
45771 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
45775 \begin_layout Standard
45777 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
45780 Do not load inputenc
45782 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
45783 from automatically loading the
45790 \begin_inset Index idx
45793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45795 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
45797 packages ! inputenc
45803 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
45804 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
45805 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45806 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45807 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45809 Note that this option is only available for the standard
45815 Traditional (auto-selected)
45822 \begin_layout Standard
45824 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
45826 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
45827 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
45828 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45829 installation supports Unicode), choose
45830 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
45831 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45832 is quite incomplete, so
45833 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
45838 (when \SpecialChar LyX
45839 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45840 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
45841 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45842 -commands is not used, because all
45843 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
45844 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45845 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45846 , two new alternative engines
45847 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45849 Both engines support Unicode natively.
45851 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
45854 \begin_inset space ~
45862 \begin_inset space ~
45870 \begin_inset space ~
45876 \begin_inset space ~
45880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45882 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
45887 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
45891 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
45896 \begin_layout Standard
45900 \begin_inset space ~
45905 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45906 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
45908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45916 The possible settings are:
45919 \begin_layout Description
45920 Default uses the language package that is selected in
45922 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45923 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45927 \begin_inset space ~
45931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45933 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
45940 \begin_layout Description
45941 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
45942 format you will use.
45943 In many cases this will be
45948 \begin_inset Index idx
45951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45959 If the newer package
45964 \begin_inset Index idx
45967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45969 packages ! polyglossia
45974 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45975 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45976 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
45978 this package will be used instead of
45985 \begin_layout Description
45987 \begin_inset space ~
45998 would be more appropriate.
46001 \begin_layout Description
46002 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
46003 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
46007 (for German texts), type in
46010 \begin_inset Newline newline
46015 usepackage{ngerman}
46018 \begin_layout Description
46019 None will not use a language package.
46020 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
46023 \begin_layout Standard
46024 Here is a list with the important encodings:
46027 \begin_layout Description
46029 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
46031 \begin_inset space ~
46035 \begin_inset space ~
46039 \begin_inset space ~
46046 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46052 \begin_inset Index idx
46055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46057 packages ! inputenc
46063 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
46064 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
46065 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
46071 \begin_layout Description
46072 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
46074 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
46075 commands, which may result in a big
46076 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
46077 -commands are needed.
46079 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
46080 This is the same as the
46093 \begin_layout Description
46095 \begin_inset space ~
46099 \begin_inset space ~
46102 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
46105 \begin_layout Description
46107 \begin_inset space ~
46111 \begin_inset space ~
46114 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
46117 \begin_layout Description
46119 \begin_inset space ~
46122 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
46125 \begin_layout Description
46127 \begin_inset space ~
46131 \begin_inset space ~
46134 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
46135 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
46138 \begin_layout Description
46140 \begin_inset space ~
46144 \begin_inset space ~
46147 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
46151 \begin_layout Description
46153 \begin_inset space ~
46157 \begin_inset space ~
46160 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
46161 ISO-8859-13 encoding
46164 \begin_layout Description
46166 \begin_inset space ~
46170 \begin_inset space ~
46174 \begin_inset space ~
46177 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
46178 \begin_inset space ~
46184 \begin_layout Description
46186 \begin_inset space ~
46190 \begin_inset space ~
46194 \begin_inset space ~
46197 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
46198 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
46201 \begin_layout Description
46203 \begin_inset space ~
46207 \begin_inset space ~
46210 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
46211 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
46212 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46213 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
46214 \begin_inset space ~
46218 \begin_inset space ~
46224 \begin_layout Description
46226 \begin_inset space ~
46230 \begin_inset space ~
46233 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
46234 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
46235 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46237 should try to use the encoding Unicode
46238 \begin_inset space ~
46242 \begin_inset space ~
46248 \begin_layout Description
46250 \begin_inset space ~
46254 \begin_inset space ~
46257 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
46260 \begin_layout Description
46262 \begin_inset space ~
46266 \begin_inset space ~
46269 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
46272 \begin_layout Description
46274 \begin_inset space ~
46278 \begin_inset space ~
46281 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
46284 \begin_layout Description
46286 \begin_inset space ~
46289 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
46292 \begin_layout Description
46294 \begin_inset space ~
46297 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
46300 \begin_layout Description
46302 \begin_inset space ~
46306 \begin_inset space ~
46309 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
46312 \begin_layout Description
46314 \begin_inset space ~
46318 \begin_inset space ~
46324 \begin_layout Description
46326 \begin_inset space ~
46330 \begin_inset space ~
46333 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
46336 \begin_layout Description
46338 \begin_inset space ~
46342 \begin_inset space ~
46348 \begin_layout Description
46350 \begin_inset space ~
46354 \begin_inset space ~
46357 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46363 \begin_inset Index idx
46366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46373 , when using this, set the document language to
46378 \begin_layout Description
46380 \begin_inset space ~
46384 \begin_inset space ~
46387 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46392 , when using this, set the document language to
46395 \begin_inset space ~
46401 \begin_layout Description
46403 \begin_inset space ~
46407 \begin_inset space ~
46410 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46416 \begin_inset Index idx
46419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46421 packages ! japanese
46426 , when using this, set the document language to
46431 \begin_layout Description
46433 \begin_inset space ~
46437 \begin_inset space ~
46440 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46445 , when using this, set the document language to
46450 \begin_layout Description
46452 \begin_inset space ~
46456 \begin_inset space ~
46459 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46464 , when using this, set the document language to
46469 \begin_layout Description
46471 \begin_inset space ~
46474 (EUC-KR) for Korean
46477 \begin_layout Description
46479 \begin_inset space ~
46483 \begin_inset space ~
46487 \begin_inset space ~
46490 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
46493 \begin_layout Description
46495 \begin_inset space ~
46499 \begin_inset space ~
46503 \begin_inset space ~
46506 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
46507 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
46508 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
46511 \begin_layout Description
46513 \begin_inset space ~
46517 \begin_inset space ~
46523 \begin_layout Description
46525 \begin_inset space ~
46529 \begin_inset space ~
46532 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
46533 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
46536 \begin_layout Description
46538 \begin_inset space ~
46542 \begin_inset space ~
46545 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46551 \begin_inset Index idx
46554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46561 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
46562 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
46564 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46565 with the default encoding (
46567 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46573 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
46574 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46579 \begin_layout Description
46581 \begin_inset space ~
46589 \begin_inset space ~
46592 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
46599 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46602 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46609 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46610 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46612 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46615 \begin_layout Description
46617 \begin_inset space ~
46621 \begin_inset space ~
46624 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46630 \begin_inset Index idx
46633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46641 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
46644 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
46646 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
46647 This used to be more comprehensive than
46650 \begin_inset space ~
46655 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
46660 \begin_layout Description
46662 \begin_inset space ~
46665 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46671 \begin_inset Index idx
46674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46676 packages ! inputenc
46683 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
46684 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
46686 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
46687 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46688 with the default encoding (
46690 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46696 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
46697 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46702 \begin_layout Description
46704 \begin_inset space ~
46708 \begin_inset space ~
46712 \begin_inset space ~
46715 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
46716 \begin_inset space ~
46722 \begin_layout Description
46724 \begin_inset space ~
46728 \begin_inset space ~
46732 \begin_inset space ~
46735 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
46736 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
46737 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
46741 \begin_layout Description
46743 \begin_inset space ~
46747 \begin_inset space ~
46751 \begin_inset space ~
46754 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
46755 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
46758 \begin_layout Section
46760 \begin_inset Index idx
46763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46770 \begin_inset Index idx
46773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46780 \begin_inset Index idx
46783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46784 Color ! Shaded boxes
46790 \begin_inset Index idx
46793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46794 Color ! Greyed-out notes
46802 \begin_layout Standard
46803 Here you can alter the font color for the
46807 (default: black), for
46810 \begin_inset space ~
46815 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
46819 (default: white) and for
46822 \begin_inset space ~
46832 sets the color back to the default.
46835 \begin_layout Standard
46836 Clicking any button showing
46844 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
46845 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
46846 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
46847 later more quickly.
46850 \begin_layout Standard
46851 Note, if you change the
46854 \begin_inset space ~
46859 font color and use the option
46862 \begin_inset space ~
46867 in the document settings under
46870 \begin_inset space ~
46875 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
46876 \begin_inset space ~
46880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46882 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
46889 \begin_layout Standard
46890 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
46896 \begin_layout Standard
46900 \begin_inset space ~
46909 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
46912 \begin_inset space ~
46915 Code after a forced page break:
46918 \begin_layout Itemize
46919 For the page color:
46920 \begin_inset Newline newline
46927 pagecolor{color name}
46930 \begin_layout Itemize
46931 For the text color:
46932 \begin_inset Newline newline
46942 \begin_layout Standard
46943 You are restricted to one of
46979 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
46986 \begin_inset space ~
46992 \begin_inset Newline newline
46995 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
46996 names to refer to them:
46999 \begin_layout Itemize
47005 \begin_inset Newline newline
47010 page_backgroundcolor
47013 \begin_layout Itemize
47017 \begin_inset space ~
47023 \begin_inset Newline newline
47031 \begin_layout Itemize
47035 \begin_inset space ~
47041 \begin_inset Newline newline
47049 \begin_layout Itemize
47053 \begin_inset space ~
47059 \begin_inset Newline newline
47067 \begin_layout Standard
47068 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
47071 \begin_inset space ~
47079 \begin_inset space ~
47087 \begin_layout Section
47089 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
47093 \begin_layout Standard
47095 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
47096 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
47097 \begin_inset space ~
47101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47103 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47111 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
47112 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
47115 \begin_layout Standard
47117 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
47118 Additionally, you can advise LyX to place a change bar in the margin of
47120 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
47123 \begin_layout Section
47127 \begin_layout Standard
47128 Here you can adjust the
47132 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
47136 as described in section
47137 \begin_inset space ~
47141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47143 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
47148 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
47152 \begin_layout Standard
47154 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
47155 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
47157 The functionality is handled by package lineno and and additional options
47158 of this package can be used as well.
47159 The most common one are:
47162 \begin_layout Description
47164 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
47165 right Line numbers to the right margin
47168 \begin_layout Description
47170 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
47171 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
47175 \begin_layout Description
47177 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
47178 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
47181 \begin_layout Description
47183 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620780
47184 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
47187 \begin_layout Description
47189 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
47191 \begin_inset space ~
47194 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
47199 \begin_layout Section
47203 \begin_layout Standard
47204 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47210 \begin_inset Index idx
47213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47215 packages ! biblatex
47225 \begin_inset Index idx
47228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47240 \begin_inset Index idx
47243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47251 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47254 Sectioned bibliography
47256 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47262 \begin_inset Index idx
47265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47267 packages ! bibtopic
47277 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
47278 Finally, you can select a document-specific
47282 for the generation of the bibliography.
47283 For a further description of these possibilities see section
47284 \begin_inset space ~
47288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47290 reference "sec:Bibliography"
47297 \begin_layout Section
47301 \begin_layout Standard
47302 Here you can define the
47306 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
47308 \begin_inset space ~
47312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47314 reference "sec:Index"
47321 \begin_layout Section
47325 \begin_layout Standard
47326 The PDF properties are explained in section
47327 \begin_inset space ~
47331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47333 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47340 \begin_layout Section
47344 \begin_layout Standard
47345 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
47346 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47352 \begin_inset Index idx
47355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47367 \begin_inset Index idx
47370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47382 \begin_inset Index idx
47385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47397 \begin_inset Index idx
47400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47412 \begin_inset Index idx
47415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47417 packages ! mathdots
47427 \begin_inset Index idx
47430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47432 packages ! mathtools
47442 \begin_inset Index idx
47445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47457 \begin_inset Index idx
47460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47462 packages ! stackrel
47472 \begin_inset Index idx
47475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47477 packages ! stmaryrd
47487 \begin_inset Index idx
47490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47492 packages ! undertilde
47497 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
47500 \begin_layout Description
47501 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47502 -errors in formulas,
47503 ensure that you have this enabled.
47506 \begin_layout Description
47507 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
47508 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47509 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
47513 \begin_layout Description
47514 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
47517 \begin_inset space ~
47529 \begin_layout Description
47530 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
47533 \begin_inset space ~
47545 \begin_layout Description
47546 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
47557 \begin_layout Description
47558 mathtools is used for the math commands
47594 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
47601 \begin_layout Description
47602 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
47604 Chemical Symbols and Equations
47613 \begin_layout Description
47614 stackrel is used for the math command
47631 \begin_layout Description
47632 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
47635 \begin_layout Description
47636 undertilde is used for the math command
47644 Accents for one Character
47653 \begin_layout Section
47655 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
47657 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
47663 \begin_layout Standard
47665 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
47666 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
47669 \begin_layout Standard
47671 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
47672 The float placement options
47673 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
47676 are described in the section
47679 \begin_inset space ~
47683 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
47685 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
47693 \begin_inset space ~
47701 \begin_layout Section
47705 \begin_layout Standard
47706 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
47708 Program Code Listings
47713 \begin_inset space ~
47721 \begin_layout Section
47725 \begin_layout Standard
47726 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
47734 set to be used and set the
47739 The itemize environment is described in section
47740 \begin_inset space ~
47744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47746 reference "sec:Itemize"
47753 \begin_layout Standard
47754 You can furthermore specify a
47757 \begin_inset space ~
47762 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47763 command of the desired character.
47764 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
47771 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
47773 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47777 \begin_inset space \space{}
47781 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
47791 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
47792 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
47795 \begin_layout Standard
47796 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47804 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47805 -packages in the preamble (menu
47808 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47809 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47812 \begin_inset space ~
47818 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
47822 usepackage{textcomp}
47825 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
47829 usepackage{amssymb}
47839 \begin_layout Section
47843 \begin_layout Standard
47844 Branches are described in section
47845 \begin_inset space ~
47849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47851 reference "sec:Branches"
47858 \begin_layout Section
47860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47862 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
47869 \begin_layout Standard
47870 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
47873 \begin_layout Description
47875 \begin_inset space ~
47879 \begin_inset space ~
47882 Format: The format that is used when you enter
47883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47902 View Master Document
47903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47910 Update Master Document
47911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47918 menu or the toolbar.
47919 The default is set in
47921 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47922 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47924 \begin_inset space ~
47927 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
47931 \begin_inset space ~
47935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47937 reference "sec:File-Formats"
47944 \begin_layout Description
47946 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
47948 \begin_inset space ~
47952 \begin_inset space ~
47956 \begin_inset space ~
47959 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
47964 option which is needed with some packages.
47965 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
47966 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
47969 \begin_layout Description
47971 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
47973 \begin_inset space ~
47977 \begin_inset space ~
47980 Options offers settings for the
47988 \begin_layout Itemize
47992 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
47994 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
47996 \begin_inset space ~
48002 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
48004 \begin_inset space ~
48008 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
48014 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
48016 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
48017 settings for the menu
48019 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48023 \begin_inset space ~
48027 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
48030 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
48031 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
48036 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
48038 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
48040 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
48043 or a detailed description see section
48045 Reverse DVI/PDF search
48050 \begin_inset space ~
48056 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
48060 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
48064 \begin_layout Itemize
48066 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
48069 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
48071 determines whether so-called
48072 \begin_inset Quotes els
48076 \begin_inset Quotes ers
48080 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
48082 \begin_inset Quotes els
48086 \begin_inset Quotes ers
48089 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
48090 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
48091 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
48093 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
48095 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
48096 macros, you can uncheck this.
48097 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
48104 \begin_layout Description
48106 \begin_inset space ~
48110 \begin_inset space ~
48113 Options offers settings for the export format
48121 \begin_inset space ~
48126 will assure that the output follows exactly version
48127 \begin_inset space ~
48130 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
48134 \begin_inset space ~
48139 settings are described in detail in section
48141 Math Output in XHTML
48146 \begin_inset space ~
48155 \begin_inset space ~
48159 \begin_inset space ~
48164 is used for the size of equations in the output.
48167 \begin_layout Description
48169 \begin_inset space ~
48174 Save transient properties
48176 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
48177 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
48178 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
48182 \begin_layout Itemize
48183 the activation of change tracking
48186 \begin_layout Itemize
48187 the output of tracked changes
48190 \begin_layout Itemize
48191 the recording of the document directory path.
48194 \begin_layout Standard
48195 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
48196 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
48200 \begin_layout Section
48208 \begin_layout Standard
48209 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48211 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
48213 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
48215 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
48219 \begin_layout Standard
48220 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48221 -syntax is given in section
48222 \begin_inset space ~
48226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48228 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
48235 \begin_layout Chapter
48241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48243 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
48248 \begin_inset Index idx
48251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48260 \begin_layout Standard
48261 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
48263 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48267 It has the following submenus.
48270 \begin_layout Section
48274 \begin_layout Subsection
48278 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48279 User Interface File
48280 \begin_inset Index idx
48283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48284 Customization ! of toolbars
48290 \begin_inset Index idx
48293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48294 Customization ! of menus
48302 \begin_layout Standard
48303 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
48304 interface (ui) file.
48305 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
48313 \begin_layout Description
48318 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
48321 \begin_layout Description
48328 the menu entries in popup context menus
48331 \begin_layout Description
48336 specifies the toolbar buttons
48339 \begin_layout Standard
48340 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
48341 and edit the entries.
48344 \begin_layout Standard
48345 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
48357 entries must be finished with an explicit
48382 and in the case of the
48383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48395 The syntax for the entries is:
48398 \begin_layout Standard
48399 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48428 \begin_layout Standard
48430 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48433 All the \SpecialChar LyX
48434 -functions are listed in the menu
48436 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
48438 \begin_inset space ~
48446 \begin_layout Standard
48447 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48453 \begin_layout Standard
48454 For example, assuming you use the menu
48456 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48459 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
48463 \begin_layout Standard
48464 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48488 \begin_layout Standard
48490 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48505 to have the sixth bookmark.
48508 \begin_layout Standard
48512 \begin_inset space ~
48517 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
48518 's toolbar buttons.
48519 The currently available icon sets are compared in
48520 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48523 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
48531 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48535 \begin_layout Standard
48538 Enable tool tips in main work area
48540 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
48544 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48548 \begin_layout Standard
48553 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
48554 should display in the menu
48556 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48558 \begin_inset space ~
48566 \begin_layout Subsection
48570 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48574 \begin_layout Standard
48577 Restore window layouts and geometries
48580 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
48581 the last \SpecialChar LyX
48585 \begin_layout Standard
48588 Restore cursor positions
48590 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
48594 \begin_layout Standard
48597 Load opened files from last session
48599 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
48603 \begin_layout Standard
48606 Clear all session information
48608 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
48609 sessions (cursor positions, names
48610 of last opened documents, etc.).
48613 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48615 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48617 name "subsec:Backup documents"
48622 \begin_inset Index idx
48625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48634 \begin_layout Standard
48637 Backup original documents when saving
48639 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
48640 it was saved the last time.
48641 It is stored in the
48644 \begin_inset space ~
48650 \begin_inset space ~
48654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48656 reference "sec:Paths"
48660 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
48663 \begin_inset space ~
48669 The backup file has the file extension
48670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48684 \begin_layout Standard
48687 Backup documents, every
48689 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
48692 \begin_layout Standard
48695 Save documents compressed by default
48697 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
48698 \begin_inset space ~
48702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48704 reference "subsec:Compressed"
48709 This applies to newly created documents only.
48710 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
48713 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48714 Windows & work area
48717 \begin_layout Standard
48720 Open documents in tabs
48722 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
48726 \begin_layout Standard
48731 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
48736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48738 \begin_inset space ~
48742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48744 reference "sec:Paths"
48748 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
48755 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
48756 documents will be opened in the same running instance
48757 of \SpecialChar LyX
48759 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
48760 instance is created for each file.
48763 \begin_layout Standard
48766 Single close-tab button
48768 is checked, there will only be one close button (
48778 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
48779 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
48780 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
48784 \begin_layout Standard
48785 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48793 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
48794 before the change takes effect.
48802 \begin_layout Standard
48807 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
48809 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
48811 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
48815 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
48816 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
48817 and only want to close the view in once instance.
48820 \begin_layout Subsection
48822 \begin_inset Index idx
48825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48832 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48834 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
48841 \begin_layout Standard
48842 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
48846 \begin_layout Standard
48847 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48855 This section only deals with the fonts
48859 the \SpecialChar LyX
48861 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
48864 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48865 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48876 \begin_layout Standard
48877 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
48894 (depends on the system) as its
48897 \begin_inset space ~
48913 \begin_layout Standard
48914 You can change the font size with the
48921 \begin_layout Standard
48926 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
48928 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48931 points have the size of 1
48932 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48936 \begin_inset space ~
48940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48942 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
48947 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
48948 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48952 The sizes are explained in detail in section
48953 \begin_inset space ~
48957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48959 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
48966 \begin_layout Subsection
48968 \begin_inset Index idx
48971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48972 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
48979 \begin_inset Index idx
48982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48991 \begin_layout Standard
48992 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
48993 by choosing an item in the
48994 list and selecting the
49001 \begin_layout Standard
49002 By checking the option
49006 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
49009 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
49010 \begin_inset space ~
49014 \begin_inset space ~
49019 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
49022 \begin_layout Subsection
49024 \begin_inset Index idx
49027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49036 \begin_layout Standard
49037 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
49041 \begin_layout Standard
49046 enables previewing snippets of your document.
49047 This feature is described in section
49048 \begin_inset space ~
49052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49054 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
49061 \begin_layout Standard
49062 Checking the option
49065 \begin_inset space ~
49069 \begin_inset space ~
49073 \begin_inset space ~
49078 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
49081 \begin_layout Section
49083 \begin_inset Index idx
49086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49095 \begin_layout Subsection
49099 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49103 \begin_layout Standard
49106 Cursor follows scrollbar
49108 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
49112 \begin_layout Standard
49113 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
49114 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
49115 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
49118 \begin_layout Standard
49121 Scroll below end of document
49123 is self-explanatory.
49126 \begin_layout Standard
49127 In \SpecialChar LyX
49128 one can jump from word to word by pressing
49135 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
49137 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
49138 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
49139 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
49143 \begin_layout Standard
49145 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924785
49148 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
49150 is for users who don't want tracked changes to be dissolved on copy and
49151 paste operations (i.
49152 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49155 e., inserted as new text with the deletions removed).
49156 If this is checked, the change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as
49157 is, independent if changes are currently tracked or not.
49158 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
49159 dissolving from insets.
49164 \begin_layout Standard
49167 Sort environments alphabetically
49169 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49172 \begin_layout Standard
49175 Group environments by their category
49177 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49180 \begin_layout Standard
49185 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
49196 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49200 \begin_layout Standard
49201 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
49206 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
49207 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
49211 \begin_layout Subsection
49213 \begin_inset Index idx
49216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49223 \begin_inset Index idx
49226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49227 Settings ! Shortcuts
49235 \begin_layout Standard
49240 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
49242 Several binding files are available, among them:
49245 \begin_layout Description
49246 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
49249 \begin_layout Description
49250 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
49262 \begin_layout Description
49263 mac.bind a set of bindings for
49266 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49274 \begin_layout Standard
49275 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
49280 , and binding files for special languages.
49281 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
49282 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49286 \begin_inset space \space{}
49290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49298 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
49299 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
49300 will try to use the appropriate binding
49304 \begin_layout Standard
49305 Some binding files, like
49309 , only have a limited scope.
49310 When looking at the end of the file
49314 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
49317 \begin_layout Standard
49321 \begin_inset space ~
49325 \begin_inset space ~
49330 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
49331 in the selected key binding file.
49334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49338 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
49343 \begin_inset Index idx
49346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49347 Key Bindings ! Editing
49355 \begin_layout Standard
49356 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
49357 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
49358 functions and the bound shortcuts.
49359 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
49362 Show key-bindings containing
49365 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
49366 Insert there for example as keyword
49367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49374 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
49375 functions that contain
49376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49384 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
49385 All \SpecialChar LyX
49386 functions are also listed in the file
49391 that you will find in the
49398 \begin_layout Standard
49399 For example, to add the shortcut
49407 , select the function and press the
49412 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
49413 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
49416 \begin_layout Standard
49417 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
49418 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
49420 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
49421 function names as a semicolon separated list.
49423 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
49428 \begin_layout Standard
49429 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
49432 \begin_layout Standard
49433 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
49435 The syntax of the entries is:
49438 \begin_layout Standard
49444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49463 \begin_layout Standard
49464 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
49465 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
49466 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49493 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
49494 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
49495 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
49496 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
49498 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
49502 , you needed to specify it as
49507 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
49510 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
49513 \begin_layout Subsection
49515 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49517 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
49522 \begin_inset Index idx
49525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49532 \begin_inset Index idx
49535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49536 Settings ! Keyboard Map
49544 \begin_layout Standard
49545 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
49546 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
49547 provides keyboard maps.
49548 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
49549 is a Romanian one, you can enable
49552 \begin_inset space ~
49556 \begin_inset space ~
49561 and select the keyboard map file named
49568 \begin_layout Standard
49577 keyboard map and, if you use the
49581 bindings, you can select the first and second with
49584 arg "keymap-primary"
49590 arg "keymap-secondary"
49593 respectively or toggle between them with
49596 arg "keymap-toggle"
49602 \begin_layout Standard
49603 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49611 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
49620 \begin_layout Standard
49621 You can also specify the mouse
49623 Wheel scrolling speed
49626 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
49630 Middle mouse button pasting
49632 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
49633 inserts the content of the clipboard.
49636 \begin_layout Standard
49644 \begin_inset space ~
49648 \begin_inset space ~
49653 you can select a key for zooming.
49654 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
49657 \begin_layout Subsection
49661 \begin_layout Standard
49662 Input completion is described in section
49663 \begin_inset space ~
49667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49669 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
49676 \begin_layout Section
49678 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49685 \begin_inset Index idx
49688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49695 \begin_inset Index idx
49698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49707 \begin_layout Standard
49708 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
49709 are normally determined during
49711 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
49714 \begin_layout Description
49716 \begin_inset space ~
49719 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
49720 's working directory.
49721 It is the default when you
49732 \begin_inset space ~
49740 \begin_layout Description
49742 \begin_inset space ~
49745 templates This directory
49746 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
49747 contains the templates that are shown
49748 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
49749 will be opened when you use the menu
49750 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
49755 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49757 \begin_inset space ~
49761 \begin_inset space ~
49769 \begin_layout Description
49771 \begin_inset space ~
49774 files This directory
49775 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
49776 will be opened when you use the
49777 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
49778 contains the example files that are listed in
49781 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
49790 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49792 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
49794 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
49800 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
49802 \begin_inset Newline newline
49806 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49818 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
49819 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
49829 \begin_layout Description
49831 \begin_inset space ~
49835 \begin_inset Index idx
49838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49844 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
49845 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
49846 \begin_inset space ~
49850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49852 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49860 will be used to save the backups.
49861 \begin_inset Newline newline
49864 Backup files have the ending
49865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49875 \begin_layout Description
49877 \begin_inset space ~
49880 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
49881 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
49883 \begin_inset Newline newline
49890 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49896 You can edit this file with the program
49905 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
49906 in its preferences under
49909 \begin_inset space ~
49915 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
49920 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
49922 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
49923 in your \SpecialChar LyX
49929 and \SpecialChar LyX
49930 need to be running the same time.
49931 \begin_inset Newline newline
49934 The pipe is also used for the
49938 feature, see section
49939 \begin_inset space ~
49943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49945 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49950 \begin_inset Newline newline
49953 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
49954 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
49955 \begin_inset Newline newline
49971 \begin_layout Description
49973 \begin_inset space ~
49976 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
49979 \begin_layout Description
49981 \begin_inset space ~
49984 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
49985 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
49986 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
49989 \begin_layout Description
49991 \begin_inset space ~
49994 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
50000 You only need to specify it if you are using
50004 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
50006 For \SpecialChar LyX
50011 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
50015 \begin_layout Description
50017 \begin_inset space ~
50020 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
50021 When \SpecialChar LyX
50022 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
50023 to find it on the system.
50024 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
50026 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
50028 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50032 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50035 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
50036 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
50039 \begin_layout Description
50041 \begin_inset space ~
50044 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
50045 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
50046 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
50047 code or in the document
50049 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
50051 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
50052 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
50053 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
50054 scanned for the input files.
50055 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
50056 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
50058 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
50059 compilation may fail for some documents.
50062 \begin_layout Section
50066 \begin_layout Standard
50067 Here you can insert your
50076 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
50078 \begin_inset space ~
50082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50084 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
50088 , to mark changes you make as yours.
50091 \begin_layout Section
50093 \begin_inset Index idx
50096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50097 Language ! Settings
50103 \begin_inset Index idx
50106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50107 Settings ! Language
50115 \begin_layout Subsection
50117 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50119 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
50126 \begin_layout Description
50128 \begin_inset space ~
50132 \begin_inset space ~
50135 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
50137 You can find its actual translation status here:
50138 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50140 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
50146 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
50150 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50152 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
50153 LaTeX Language Support
50158 \begin_layout Description
50160 \begin_inset space ~
50163 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
50164 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
50165 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
50166 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
50167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50183 The most widespread language package is
50188 \begin_inset Index idx
50191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50198 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
50200 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
50201 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
50202 come with the alternative
50208 \begin_inset Index idx
50211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50213 packages ! polyglossia
50218 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
50219 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
50225 The available selections are described in section
50226 \begin_inset space ~
50230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50232 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
50239 \begin_layout Description
50241 \begin_inset space ~
50245 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
50246 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
50247 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
50249 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
50253 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
50257 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
50259 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
50263 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
50264 that is used to switch to a different language
50265 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
50266 to start the package
50270 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
50271 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
50275 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
50276 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
50279 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50283 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50291 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
50299 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
50302 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
50304 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50308 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50326 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50327 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
50334 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
50335 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50340 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
50345 , this setting is ignored.
50350 \begin_layout Description
50352 \begin_inset space ~
50356 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
50363 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
50364 Use this if the language switch set in
50368 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
50372 's alternative command
50376 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
50377 \SpecialChar allowbreak
50380 end{otherlanguage*}
50384 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
50385 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
50386 command toggles the package on and off
50387 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
50388 Empty by default, as
50392 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50394 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
50399 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50405 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
50410 , this setting is ignored.
50415 \begin_layout Description
50417 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
50419 \begin_inset space ~
50423 \begin_inset space ~
50426 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
50430 \begin_layout Description
50432 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
50434 \begin_inset space ~
50438 \begin_inset space ~
50441 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
50447 \begin_layout Description
50449 \begin_inset space ~
50453 \begin_inset space ~
50457 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
50459 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
50462 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
50463 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
50466 to the document class options
50467 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
50468 rather than the language package options.
50469 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
50473 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
50474 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
50476 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
50477 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
50479 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
50484 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
50485 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
50494 \begin_layout Description
50496 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
50498 \begin_inset space ~
50502 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
50504 \begin_inset space ~
50508 \begin_inset space ~
50512 \begin_inset space ~
50518 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
50520 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
50523 this option is set,
50524 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
50525 the language switch defined in
50528 \begin_inset space ~
50533 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
50534 to the document language.
50535 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
50536 This might be needed if you use a non-default
50539 \begin_inset space ~
50544 or if a package resets the document language.
50545 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
50546 usually should be the document language).
50547 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
50548 documents start with the chosen document language.
50549 When this option is not set, the
50552 \begin_inset space ~
50557 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50559 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
50562 \begin_inset space ~
50572 \begin_layout Description
50574 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
50576 \begin_inset space ~
50580 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
50582 \begin_inset space ~
50586 \begin_inset space ~
50590 \begin_inset space ~
50596 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
50600 \begin_inset space ~
50604 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
50605 Set document language explicitly
50611 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
50613 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
50619 \begin_inset space ~
50625 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
50627 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
50631 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
50633 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
50636 the end of the document.
50637 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
50641 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50642 \paragraph_spacing single
50644 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
50650 \begin_layout Description
50652 \begin_inset space ~
50656 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
50658 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
50662 \begin_inset space ~
50666 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
50668 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
50670 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
50674 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
50677 in a language different
50678 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
50680 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
50683 the document language will be
50684 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
50685 marked (by default with a blue
50688 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
50690 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
50694 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
50698 \begin_layout Description
50700 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
50702 \begin_inset space ~
50706 \begin_inset space ~
50710 \begin_inset space ~
50713 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
50714 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
50715 switched via the operating system.
50716 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
50718 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50721 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
50722 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
50727 \begin_layout Description
50729 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
50731 \begin_inset space ~
50735 \begin_inset space ~
50738 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
50739 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
50744 \begin_layout Description
50746 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
50748 \begin_inset space ~
50752 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
50754 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
50758 \begin_inset space ~
50762 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
50763 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
50764 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
50766 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
50770 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
50772 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
50773 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
50775 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50776 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
50777 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
50779 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
50784 \begin_layout Standard
50789 means that the cursor
50790 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
50791 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
50792 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
50794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50797 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
50798 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
50802 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
50804 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
50805 specific case always means: move
50809 in text (even if this means:
50815 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50816 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
50817 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
50818 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
50819 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
50820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50831 \begin_layout Standard
50833 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
50838 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
50839 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
50840 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
50844 ) when coming from the left.
50845 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
50847 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50848 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
50849 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
50854 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50856 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
50860 \begin_layout Description
50862 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
50864 \begin_inset space ~
50868 \begin_inset space ~
50871 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
50872 separator alignment).
50873 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
50875 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50878 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
50879 (static) custom character here.
50882 \begin_layout Description
50884 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
50886 \begin_inset space ~
50890 \begin_inset space ~
50893 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
50899 \begin_layout Subsection
50903 \begin_layout Standard
50904 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
50905 \begin_inset space ~
50909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50911 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
50918 \begin_layout Section
50922 \begin_layout Subsection
50924 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50926 name "subsec:General-output"
50933 \begin_layout Description
50935 \begin_inset space ~
50938 search Commands that will be used for the menu
50940 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
50942 \begin_inset space ~
50948 For a detailed description see section
50950 Reverse DVI/PDF search
50955 \begin_inset space ~
50963 \begin_layout Description
50965 \begin_inset space ~
50968 Options Options for the program
50972 that is used for the export format
50977 \begin_inset space ~
50981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50983 reference "subsec:Export"
50988 Possible options are listed in the
50993 \begin_inset Newline newline
50997 \begin_inset Flex URL
51000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51002 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
51012 \begin_layout Description
51014 \begin_inset space ~
51018 \begin_inset space ~
51021 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
51024 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51025 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
51027 \begin_inset space ~
51033 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
51036 \begin_layout Description
51038 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
51040 \begin_inset space ~
51044 \begin_inset Index idx
51047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51054 \begin_inset Index idx
51057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51058 Settings ! Date format
51063 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
51064 \begin_inset Newline newline
51068 \begin_inset Flex URL
51071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51073 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
51079 \begin_inset Newline newline
51082 For example the format
51083 \begin_inset Newline newline
51087 \begin_inset Newline newline
51090 prints the date as day/month/year.
51095 \begin_layout Description
51097 \begin_inset space ~
51101 \begin_inset space ~
51104 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
51105 is allowed to overwrite on export.
51108 \begin_layout Subsection
51114 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51116 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
51121 \begin_inset Index idx
51124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51125 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
51134 \begin_layout Description
51136 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
51138 \begin_inset space ~
51146 \begin_inset space ~
51150 \begin_inset space ~
51153 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
51158 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
51179 are used for Cyrillic.
51180 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
51181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51193 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
51195 sets up in the background.
51196 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
51201 \begin_layout Description
51203 \begin_inset space ~
51207 \begin_inset space ~
51211 \begin_inset space ~
51215 \begin_inset space ~
51218 options They only have an effect when the program
51222 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
51225 \begin_layout Standard
51226 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
51227 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
51228 manuals of the applications.
51231 \begin_layout Description
51233 \begin_inset space ~
51236 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
51237 \begin_inset space ~
51241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51243 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
51250 \begin_layout Description
51252 \begin_inset space ~
51255 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
51256 \begin_inset space ~
51260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51262 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
51269 \begin_layout Description
51271 \begin_inset space ~
51274 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
51275 \begin_inset space ~
51279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51281 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
51288 \begin_layout Description
51294 \begin_inset space ~
51297 command Command for the program
51299 Check\SpecialChar TeX
51302 that is described in the section
51304 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
51309 Additional Features
51314 \begin_layout Standard
51315 There are additionally the following options:
51318 \begin_layout Description
51320 \begin_inset space ~
51324 \begin_inset space ~
51328 \begin_inset space ~
51332 \begin_inset space ~
51337 \begin_inset space ~
51340 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
51341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51358 to separate folders.
51359 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
51361 \begin_inset Index idx
51364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51371 \begin_inset Index idx
51374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51383 \begin_layout Description
51385 \begin_inset space ~
51389 \begin_inset space ~
51393 \begin_inset space ~
51397 \begin_inset space ~
51401 \begin_inset space ~
51405 \begin_inset space ~
51408 changes Removes all manually set
51414 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51415 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51417 \begin_inset space ~
51422 dialog when changing the document class.
51425 \begin_layout Section
51427 \begin_inset space ~
51431 \begin_inset Index idx
51434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51443 \begin_layout Subsection
51445 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51447 name "subsec:Converters"
51452 \begin_inset Index idx
51455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51464 \begin_layout Standard
51465 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
51466 from one format to another.
51467 You can modify converters or create new ones.
51468 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
51475 \begin_inset space ~
51480 field and press the
51485 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
51489 \begin_inset space ~
51494 drop-down list, modify the
51498 field and press the
51505 \begin_layout Standard
51508 Converter File Cache
51514 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
51516 Maximum Age (in days
51519 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
51520 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
51523 \begin_layout Standard
51524 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
51525 definition, is described in the section
51536 \begin_layout Subsection
51538 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51540 name "sec:File-Formats"
51545 \begin_inset Index idx
51548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51555 \begin_inset Index idx
51558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51567 \begin_layout Standard
51568 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
51578 programs that should be used for certain formats.
51581 \begin_layout Standard
51582 You can also define the
51584 Default output format
51586 that is used when you use
51588 View, Update, View Master Document
51592 Update Master Document
51598 menu or the toolbar.
51601 \begin_layout Standard
51602 More about formats and their options is described in the section
51613 \begin_layout Standard
51614 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
51616 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
51617 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
51618 This is done by specifying a
51623 More about this is described in the section
51634 \begin_layout Chapter
51635 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
51637 \begin_inset Index idx
51640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51649 name "chap:Units-available-in"
51656 \begin_layout Standard
51658 \begin_inset space ~
51662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51664 reference "tab:Units"
51668 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
51669 and used in this documentation.
51672 \begin_layout Standard
51673 \begin_inset Float table
51680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51681 \begin_inset Caption Standard
51683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51699 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
51705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51707 \begin_inset Tabular
51708 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
51709 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
51710 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51711 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
51712 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51762 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51795 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51799 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51861 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51865 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
51869 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52026 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52030 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52063 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52067 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52100 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52104 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52136 scaled point (65536
52137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52141 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52204 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
52209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52328 % of original image width
52333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52417 \begin_layout Standard
52418 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
52421 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
52428 \begin_layout Bibliography
52429 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52430 LatexCommand bibitem
52437 The \SpecialChar LyX
52439 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52442 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
52448 \begin_inset Newline newline
52452 \begin_inset Flex URL
52455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52457 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
52465 \begin_layout Bibliography
52466 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52467 LatexCommand bibitem
52468 key "latexcompanion"
52473 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
52475 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
52476 Companion Second Edition.
52479 Addison-Wesley, 2004
52482 \begin_layout Bibliography
52483 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52484 LatexCommand bibitem
52490 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
52493 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
52497 Addison-Wesley, 2003
52500 \begin_layout Bibliography
52501 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52502 LatexCommand bibitem
52511 : A Document Preparation System.
52514 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
52517 \begin_layout Bibliography
52518 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52519 LatexCommand bibitem
52529 The \SpecialChar TeX
52533 Addison-Wesley, 1984
52536 \begin_layout Bibliography
52537 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52538 LatexCommand bibitem
52544 The \SpecialChar TeX
52546 \begin_inset Newline newline
52550 \begin_inset Flex URL
52553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52555 https://ctan.org/topic
52563 \begin_layout Bibliography
52564 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52565 LatexCommand bibitem
52571 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
52573 \begin_inset Newline newline
52577 \begin_inset Flex URL
52580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52582 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
52590 \begin_layout Bibliography
52591 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52592 LatexCommand bibitem
52599 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52601 name "Documentation"
52602 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
52609 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52613 \begin_inset Newline newline
52617 \begin_inset Flex URL
52620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52622 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
52630 \begin_layout Bibliography
52631 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52632 LatexCommand bibitem
52639 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52641 name "Documentation"
52642 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
52647 how to use the program
52649 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52653 \begin_inset Newline newline
52657 \begin_inset Flex URL
52660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52662 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
52670 \begin_layout Bibliography
52671 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52672 LatexCommand bibitem
52679 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52681 name "Documentation"
52682 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
52687 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52693 \begin_inset Index idx
52696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52698 packages ! biblatex
52704 \begin_inset Newline newline
52708 \begin_inset Flex URL
52711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52713 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
52721 \begin_layout Bibliography
52722 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52723 LatexCommand bibitem
52730 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52732 name "Documentation"
52733 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
52738 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52744 \begin_inset Index idx
52747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52755 \begin_inset Newline newline
52759 \begin_inset Flex URL
52762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52764 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
52772 \begin_layout Bibliography
52773 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52774 LatexCommand bibitem
52781 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52783 name "Documentation"
52784 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
52794 \begin_inset Newline newline
52798 \begin_inset Flex URL
52801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52803 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
52811 \begin_layout Bibliography
52812 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52813 LatexCommand bibitem
52814 key "makeindex-man"
52820 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52823 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
52833 \begin_inset Newline newline
52837 \begin_inset Flex URL
52840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52842 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
52850 \begin_layout Bibliography
52851 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52852 LatexCommand bibitem
52859 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52861 name "Documentation"
52862 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
52872 \begin_inset Newline newline
52876 \begin_inset Flex URL
52879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52881 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
52889 \begin_layout Bibliography
52890 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52891 LatexCommand bibitem
52898 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52900 name "Documentation"
52901 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
52906 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
52908 \begin_inset Newline newline
52912 \begin_inset Flex URL
52915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52917 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
52925 \begin_layout Bibliography
52926 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52927 LatexCommand bibitem
52934 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52936 name "Documentation"
52937 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
52942 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52948 \begin_inset Index idx
52951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52959 \begin_inset Newline newline
52963 \begin_inset Flex URL
52966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52968 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
52976 \begin_layout Bibliography
52977 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52978 LatexCommand bibitem
52985 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52987 name "Documentation"
52988 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
52993 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52999 \begin_inset Index idx
53002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53004 packages ! enumitem
53010 \begin_inset Newline newline
53014 \begin_inset Flex URL
53017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53019 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
53027 \begin_layout Bibliography
53028 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53029 LatexCommand bibitem
53036 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53038 name "Documentation"
53039 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
53044 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53050 \begin_inset Index idx
53053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53055 packages ! fancyhdr
53061 \begin_inset Newline newline
53065 \begin_inset Flex URL
53068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53070 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
53078 \begin_layout Bibliography
53079 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53080 LatexCommand bibitem
53087 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53089 name "Documentation"
53090 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
53095 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53101 \begin_inset Index idx
53104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53106 packages ! hyperref
53112 \begin_inset Newline newline
53116 \begin_inset Flex URL
53119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53121 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
53129 \begin_layout Bibliography
53130 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53131 LatexCommand bibitem
53138 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53140 name "Documentation"
53141 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
53146 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53152 \begin_inset Index idx
53155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53157 packages ! microtype
53163 \begin_inset Newline newline
53167 \begin_inset Flex URL
53170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53172 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
53180 \begin_layout Bibliography
53181 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53182 LatexCommand bibitem
53189 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53191 name "Documentation"
53192 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
53197 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53203 \begin_inset Index idx
53206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53214 \begin_inset Newline newline
53218 \begin_inset Flex URL
53221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53223 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
53231 \begin_layout Bibliography
53232 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53233 LatexCommand bibitem
53240 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53242 name "Documentation"
53243 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
53248 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53254 \begin_inset Index idx
53257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53259 packages ! prettyref
53265 \begin_inset Newline newline
53269 \begin_inset Flex URL
53272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53274 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
53282 \begin_layout Bibliography
53283 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53284 LatexCommand bibitem
53291 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53293 name "Documentation"
53294 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
53299 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53305 \begin_inset Index idx
53308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53310 packages ! refstyle
53316 \begin_inset Newline newline
53320 \begin_inset Flex URL
53323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53325 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
53333 \begin_layout Bibliography
53334 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53335 LatexCommand bibitem
53342 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53345 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
53350 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53352 \begin_inset Newline newline
53356 \begin_inset Flex URL
53359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53361 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
53369 \begin_layout Bibliography
53370 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53371 LatexCommand bibitem
53378 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53381 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
53386 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53388 \begin_inset Newline newline
53392 \begin_inset Flex URL
53395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53397 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
53405 \begin_layout Bibliography
53406 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53407 LatexCommand bibitem
53414 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53417 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
53422 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53423 for Cyrillic languages:
53424 \begin_inset Newline newline
53428 \begin_inset Flex URL
53431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53433 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
53441 \begin_layout Bibliography
53442 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53443 LatexCommand bibitem
53450 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53453 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
53458 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53460 \begin_inset Newline newline
53464 \begin_inset Flex URL
53467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53469 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
53477 \begin_layout Bibliography
53478 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53479 LatexCommand bibitem
53486 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53489 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
53494 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53496 \begin_inset Newline newline
53500 \begin_inset Flex URL
53503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53505 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
53513 \begin_layout Bibliography
53514 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53515 LatexCommand bibitem
53522 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53525 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
53530 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53532 \begin_inset Newline newline
53536 \begin_inset Flex URL
53539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53541 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
53549 \begin_layout Standard
53550 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
53557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53584 \begin_inset Note Note
53587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53594 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
53595 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
53596 bibliography is the second one:
53604 \begin_layout Standard
53605 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
53606 LatexCommand bibtex
53607 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
53608 options "biblio/alphadin"
53615 \begin_layout Standard
53616 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53620 \begin_layout Standard
53624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53630 pagedeclaration}[1]{
53633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53639 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
53647 \begin_inset Note Note
53650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53651 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
53652 \begin_inset space ~
53656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53658 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
53670 \begin_layout Standard
53671 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
53672 LatexCommand printnomenclature
53678 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
53679 LatexCommand printindex